You are on page 1of 138

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Control
IT
Single Loop Controller
53SL6000
53SL6000 CONTROLLER
PN24991
The following are trademarks of ABB Automation Inc:
EasyTune
Micro-DCI
WARNING notices as used in this manual apply to hazards or unsafe practices which could result in personal in-
jury or death.
CAUTION notices apply to hazards or unsafe practices which could result in property damage.
NOTES highlight procedures and contain information which assist the operator in understanding the information
contained in this manual.
All software, including design, appearance, algorithms and source codes, is owned and copyrighted by
ABB Automation Inc. or its suppliers.
WARNING
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
Do not install, maintain or operate this equipment without reading, understanding and following the
proper ABB Automation instructions and manuals, otherwise injury or damage may result.
POSSIBLE PROCESS UPSETS
Maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel and only after securing equipment
controlled by this product. Adjusting or removing this product while it is in the system may upset the
process being controlled. Some process upsets may cause injury or damage.
NOTICE
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. ABB Automation Inc.
reserves the right to make minor changes to this publication, such as company name & logos as well as
other minor corrections, without necessarily changing the publication number.
ABB Automation Inc., its affiliates, employees, and agents, and the authors of and contributors to this
publication specifically disclaim all liabilities and warranties, express and implied (including warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose), for the accuracy, currency, completeness, and/or
reliability of the information contained herein and/or for the fitness for any particular use and/or for the
performance of any material and/or equipment selected in whole or part with the user of/or in reliance
upon information contained herein. Selection of materials and/or equipment is at the sole risk of the
user of this publication.
This document contains proprietary information of ABB Automation Inc. and is issued in strict
confidence. Its use, or reproduction for use, for the reverse engineering, development or manufacture of
hardware or software described herein is prohibited. No part of this document may be photocopied or
reproduced without the prior written consent of ABB Automation Inc.
Copyright 2001 ABB Automation Inc. [April 2001]
Table of Contents
Safety Summary I
Read First II
1.0 Introduction 1-1
1.1 53SL6000 Controller Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Controller Model Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2.0 Installation and Power-Up Procedures 2-1
2.1 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Site Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3.1 Single Cutout Installation (NEMA4 Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3.2 Multiple Cutout Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.4 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.4.1 24 V DC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4.2 AC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.5 Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.5.1 Analog Inputs AI1 and AI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.2 Discrete Outputs DO1 and DO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.3 Discrete Inputs DI1 and DI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5.4 Analog Output AO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.6 Universal Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.6.1 Universal Analog Input Module Backplane Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.6.2 Universal Analog Input Module Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.6.2.1 Thermocouple Connections and Burn-out Detection . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.7 2DI/2DO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.7.1 2DI/2DO Backplane Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.7.2 2DI/2DO Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.8 RS-232 and RS-485 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.8.1 RS-232 Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.8.2 RS-485 Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.9 Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.9.1 Power-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3.0 Display Panel 3-1
3.1 Display Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Operator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Operator Mode Panel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 Auxiliary Operator Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4 Operator Mode Overflow/ Underflow Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table of Contents 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
i
3.5 Engineer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.5.1 Engineer Mode Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.5.2 Engineer Mode Hierarchical Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.5.2.1 Editing a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.5.2.2 Deselecting and Scrolling Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5.2.3 Editing a Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5.2.4 Editing the Tag Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6 Entering a Pass-Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.6.1 Configuring a Pass-Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.7 Offline Display Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.8 Engineer Mode oPEr Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.9 Display Alphanumerics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.10 Engineer Mode Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
4.0 Functional Overview 4-1
4.1 Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Detailed Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
5.0 Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 5-1
5.1 I/O Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 Universal Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3.1 Universal Analog Input Module Parameter Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.4 Analog Output 1 (AO1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.5 Discrete Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.6 Discrete Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.7 RS-232 and RS-485 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
6.0 Signal Value Modification 6-1
6.1 Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Characterizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1. 3SEG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 LSEG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.3 PrGM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.4 DtoA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Math Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.1 ALG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3.2 SuMM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3.3 PoLY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.4 PoWr Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.5 LoG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.6 LiM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.7 SEL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.8 Gas Flow Compensation Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.8.1 Linear Gas Flow Compensation (LFLo) Equation . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.8.2 Square Root Gas Flow Compensation (SFLo) Equation . . . . . . 6-7
6.4 Logic Blocks 1, 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
ii
7.0 Control Scheme Block 7-1
7.1 Control Scheme Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Control Scheme Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 Control Scheme Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.4 Signal Paths for the SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM Control Schemes . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4.1 Setpoint (SP-PV) Paths for the SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM Control . . . . . 7-6
7.4.2 PID Paths for the SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM Control Schemes . . . . . . 7-6
7.4.3 OUT Paths for the SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM Control Schemes . . . . . . 7-6
7.5 Signal Paths for the in.Ld Control Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.6 Control Scheme Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.7 Control Loop Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.8 Control Scheme Signal Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
8.0 Eight Control Strategies 8-1
8.1 Single Loop Control with Remote Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 AI1 - Process Variable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2 AI2 - Remote Setpoint Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.3 DO1 - PV High Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.4 DO2 - PV Low Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.5 DI1 - Force Control Output Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.6 DI2 - Remote Enable Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.7 AO1 - Control Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.8 SchM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Analog Back-Up Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.1 AI1 - Process Variable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 AI2 - Control Element Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.3 DO1 - Computer Output Diverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.4 DO2 - Backup Output Diverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.5 DI1 - Computer Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.6 DI2 - Auto Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.7 A01 - Backup Control Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.8 SchM Selection and Path Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3 Ratio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3.1 AI1 - Controlled Variable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3.2 AI2 - Wild Variable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3.3 DO1 - Controlled Variable High Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3.4 DO2 - Controlled Variable Low Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3.5 DI1 - Force Control Output Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.6 DI2 - Ratio Enable Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.7 Control Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.8 SPM = K-SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.9 SchM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.4 Auto/Manual Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.1 AI1 - Process Variable 1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.2 AI2 - Process Variable 2 Input (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.3 DO1 - PV1 High Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.4 D02 - PV1 Low Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.4.5 DI1 Force Output Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.4.7 A01 - PV2 Re-Transmit (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.4.8 SchM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Table of Contents 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
iii
8.5 Single Station Cascade Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.5.1 AI1 - Secondary PV Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.5.2 AI2 - Primary PV Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.5.3 DO1 - Secondary PV High Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.5.4 DO2 - Secondary PV Low Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5.5 DI1 - Force Control Output Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5.6 DI2 - Cascade Enable Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5.7 Primary Output (the Setpoint into the Secondary Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5.8 AO1 - Control Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5.9 SchM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.6 Single Station Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.6.1 AI1 - Primary PV Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.6.2 AI2 - Limiting PV Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.6.3 DO1 - Primary PV High AlarmContact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.6.4 DO2 - Primary PV Low Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.6.5 DI1 - Force Control Output Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.6.6 DI2 - Secondary Setpoint Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.6.7 AO1 - Control Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.6.8 SchM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.7 Dual Indicator with Re-Transmitted PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.7.1 AI1 - PV1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.7.2 AI2 - PV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.7.3 DO1 - PV1 High Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.7.4 DO2 - PV1 Low Alarm Contact Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.7.5 A01 - Retransmitted PV1 or PV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.7.6 SchM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.8 Proportional Speed Floating Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.8.1 Motorized Valve Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.8.2 Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.8.3 Speed Factor Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
9.0 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Proportional Action (Pb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.3 Integral Action (tr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.4 Derivative Action (td) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.5 Trial and Error Tuning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.6 Proportional Cycle Tuning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.7 Step Response Tuning Method (Ziegler-Nichols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.8 Easy-Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.8.1 Executing Easy-Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.8.2 Easy-Tune Determined Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.8.3 Easy-Tune Status Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.8.3.1 out Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.2 dout Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.3 dPV Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.4 outX Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.5 StiM Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.6 PtiM Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.7 WtiM Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.8 KtiM Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.9 ttiM Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.10 Abrt Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
iv
9.8.3.11 PidL Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.12 cM Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.13 cASc Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8.3.14 oVr Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Appendix A: Glossary A-1
Appendix B: Maintenance and Parts List B-1
B.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.3 Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.4 Controller Confidence Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.4.1 Jumper Connections for the Controller Confidence Test . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.4.2 Starting the Controller Confidence Test via the Faceplate Push Buttons . . . . B-4
B.4.3 Starting the Controller Confidence Test via Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.4.4 Controller Confidence Test Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4.5 Controller Confidence Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4.6 Exiting the Controller Confidence Test via the Faceplate Push Buttons . . . . . B-5
B.4.7 Exiting the Controller Confidence Test via Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.5 Defaulting the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.6 Analog Input/Output Calibration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.7 Watchdog LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Appendix C: Datalink Protocol C-1
C.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.2 Configuring the System Module for Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.3 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.3.1 Message Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.3.2 Transaction Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.4 Mnemonic-to-Datapoint Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.4.1 Database Starting Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.4.2 Controller Memory Address Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.4.3 Database Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.5 Executing Controller Self Tests via Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Appendix D: Prompt List D-1
Photocopy-Ready Pocket Reference Guide Last Sheet
Table of Contents 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
v
List of Tables
Table 1-1. 53SL6000 Model Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Table 2-1. Controller Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Table 3-1. Operator Mode Display Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Table 3-2. Setpoint Up/Down Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-3. oPEr Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Table 3-4. Operator Enable (oPr) Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Table 5-1. Analog Input Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-2. Analog Input Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-3. Input Type Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Table 5-4. Volt/Millivolt Input Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-5. Thermocouple Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-6. RTD Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-7. Frequency/Pulse Input Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-8. Calibration Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-9. Analog Output Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-10. Analog Output Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-11. Discrete Input Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-12. Discrete Output Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-13. System (SYS) Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Table 6-1. Characterizer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Table 6-2. Math Function Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-3. Logic Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Table 6-4. Discrete Logic Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Table 7-1. Control Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Table 7-2. Control Scheme Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Table 7-3. Control Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Table 9-1. ITAE Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Table 9-2. Easy-Tune Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Table 9-3. Easy-Tune Determined Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Table B-1. Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Table B-2. Confidence Test Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Table B-3. Factory Subtest Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Table C-1. System (SYS) Prompts (Datalink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Table C-2. Datalink Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Table C-3. Datapoint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Table C-4. Database Starting Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Table C-5. Datapoint Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
vi
List of Figures
Figure 1-1. 53SL6000 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Figure 2-1. Panel Cutout and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-2. Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-3. 24 V DC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-4. AC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-5. Signal Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-6. Signal Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-7. Universal Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-8. Input Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-9. 2DI/2DO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-10. 2DI Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-11. 2DO Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-12. RS-232 or RS-485 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-13. RS-232 Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-14. RS-485 Plug Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 3-1. Display Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-3. Overflow/Underflow Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-4. Engineer Mode Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-5. Editing a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-6. Deselecting and Scrolling Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-7. Editing a Red dro Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-8. Moving the Red dro Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-9. Editing a tAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-10. KEY? Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-11. Offline Display Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-12. Display Alphanumerics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 4-1. Simplified Controller Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4-2. Detailed Functional Controller Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 7-1. Input Signal Designators by Control Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-2. Control Signal Logic Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Figure 7-3. SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM Signal Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-4. Common Setpoint Logic Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Figure 7-5. Local Standard (Std) Setpoint Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Figure 7-6. Remote Ratio Setpoint Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-7. StV Setpoint Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-8. PVt Setpoint Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-9. cASc Control Scheme Setpoint Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-10. Pb, td, and tr PID Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-11. Pb, td, tr, and FF PID Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Figure 7-12. Pb, td, tr, and FF PID Paths with EXrF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Figure 7-13. Output Tracking Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-14. Auto Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-15. Manual Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Table of Contents 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
vii
Figure 7-16. Auto Digital Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Figure 7-17. in.Ld Control Scheme Alarmed Variable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-18. in.Ld Control Scheme Auto Input with Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-19. in.Ld Control Scheme Output Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-20. in.Ld Control Scheme Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 7-21. Control Schemes Signal Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 8-1. Single Loop Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Figure 8-2. Single Loop Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Figure 8-3. Backup Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-4. Output Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-5. Backup Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-6. Ratio Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-7. Ratio Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-8. A/M Selector Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-9. A/M Selector Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-10. Single Station Cascade Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Figure 8-11. Single Station Cascade Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Figure 8-12. Single Station Override Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Figure 8-13. Single Station Override Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Figure 8-14. Dual Indicator Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-15. Dual Indicator Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-16. Proportional Speed Floating Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Figure 9-1. Typical Step Response Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 9-2. Easy-Tune Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-3. Preliminary Step Response - Actual Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-4. Preliminary Step Response - Approximated Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-5. Easy-Tune Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Figure B-1. Illustrated Parts Breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Figure B-2. Bezel and Lever Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Figure B-3. Confidence Test Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Figure B-4. Watchdog LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Figure C-1. Floating Point Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
viii
GENERAL Electric Shock Hazard During Maintenance
WARNINGS Disconnect power or take precautions to ensure that contact with
energized parts is avoided when servicing.
Input Connector Shock Hazard
Instruments powered from an ac line source may cause input connec-
tors to have power even though the controller is powered off.
Safety Hazard
Substitution of or modification with improper replacement components
may impair the safety of this device.
GENERAL Equipment Environment
CAUTIONS All components, whether in transportation, operation or storage must
be in a noncorrosive environment.
Special Handling
This unit uses electrostatic sensitive devices.
SPECIFIC Instruments that are powered from an ac line service
WARNINGS constitute a potential electric shock hazard to the user; therefore, only
qualified technicians should install the unit. Make certain that the ac
power lines are disconnected from the operating branch circuit before
attempting electrical connections. (p. 2-1)
Always remove power before attempting to install, disassemble, or
service the controller. Failure to remove power may result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage. (p. B-2)
SPECIFIC Use a grounded wrist strap to prevent damage to integrated circuit
CAUTIONS devices when handling circuit boards. (p. B-2)
Safety Summary
53SL6000 Instruction Manual I
Read First
WARNING
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
Do not install, maintain, or operate this equipment without reading,
understanding and following the proper ABB Automation instructions
and manuals, otherwise injury or damage may result.
RETURN OF EQUIPMENT
All Flowmeters and/or Signal Converters being returned to ABB
Automation for repair must be free of any hazardous materials (acids,
alkalis, solvents, etc). A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all
process liquids must accompany returned equipment. Contact ABB
Automation for authorization prior to returning equipment.
Read these instructions before starting installation;
save these instructions for future reference.
Contacting ABB Automation Inc.
Should assistance be required with any ABB Instrumentation product, contact the following:
Telephone:
ABB Instrumentation Technical Support Center
1 (800) 697-9619
E-Mail:
ins.techsupport@us.abb.com
II
1.1 53SL6000 Controller Overview
The 53SL6000 controller is a functionally robust
instrument capable of performing any one of many
control strategies. Typical control strategies that
can be readily implemented are:
Single Loop Control with Remote Setpoint
(PID control)
Analog Back-up Control
Ratio Control (PID control)
Auto/Manual Selector
Single Station Cascade Control (Dual PID
control)
Single Station Override Control (Dual PID
control)
Dual Indicator with Re-Transmitted Proc-
ess Variable (PV)
Proportional Speed Floating Control (re-
quires the 2DI/2DO option module)
The complexity of learning software languages or
signal interconnection schemes is eliminated, as all
parameter entries are prompt-driven to configure
a control strategy. Mnemonic prompts appear on
the di spl ay panel to sol i ci t the necessary re-
sponses.
As listed below, a suite of control modifiers and
signal conditioners is provided to supplement every
control strategy.
Control Modifiers:
External Reset Feedback
Additive Feedforward
External/Internal (Safety) Output Tracking
Output High/Low/Rate-of-Change Limiting
Process Vari able/Internal (Safety) Set-
point Tracking
Setpoint High/Low/Rate-of-Change
Limiting
Signal Conditioners:
Twelve Linear Segment Characterizer
Five Third Order Segment Characterizer
Third Order Polynomial
Flow Compensation
Exponentiation
Algebraic Component Combinations
Logarithmic Extraction
Contact Duration-to-Analog
Summation
Setpoint Programmer
Every control strategy is also supported with a
standard controller I/O complement that includes
two 0/4-20 mA inputs, two digital/contact inputs,
one 0/4-20 mA output, and two contact outputs.
Also available for every control strategy is addi-
tional functionality provided by optional I/O mod-
ul es that mount external l y at the rear of the
controller for easy upgrade. Available option mod-
ules are as follows:
RS-232 Communications Module - provides
personal computer communication port con-
nectivity (can not coexist with the RS-485 mod-
ule).
RS-485 Communications Module - provides
datalink connectivity capabilities (can not co-
exist with the RS-232 module).
Universal Analog Input Module - provides one
or two isolated inputs that accept RTD, thermo-
couple, millivolt, volt, and frequency inputs.
The thermocouple and RTD inputs are auto-
matically linearized.
2DI/2DO Module - provides two additional digi-
tal inputs and two digital outputs. With this
option, a time proportional or three-step output
can be applied to the 2DO relays for propor-
tional speed floating control.
Power dependent transmitters are provided operat-
ing current from a 50 mA (24 V dc) transmitter
power supply located in the controller.
Tuning the 53SL6000 controller is automated with
EasyTune, the ABB Automation algorithm de-
signed to calculate the optimal PID values for pre-
ci se anal og cont r ol r esponses t o pr ocess
deviations.
The 53SL6000 controller is easy to install due to its
small size. Installation depth is only 2 7/8 inches
(73 mm) wi thout opti on modules and 4 21/32
inches (118.1 mm) with option modules. A 1 inch
(25.4 mm) access space is required for rear termi-
nal plug removal and insertion.
An illustration of the 53SL6000 controller that de-
picts the front display panel and the option modules
is provided in Figure 1-1.
1.0 Introduction
Section 1. Introduction 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
1-1
Figure 1-1. 53SL6000 Controller
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 1. Introduction
1-2
1.2 Controller Model Numbers
The 53SL6000 controller model numbers are de-
scribed in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1. 53SL6000 Model Numbers
53 SL6 A
Controllers 53
Design Designator
(includes analog inputs
1 and 2, analog output
1, discrete inputs 1 and
2, discrete outputs 1
and 2)
SL6
Power Requirements:
120/240 V ac 0
24 V dc 1
Option Slot A Module:
None 0
Single Universal Analog Input
(analog input 3)
1
Dual Universal Analog Input
(analog inputs 3 and 4)
(Each universal analog input can
accept RTD, thermocouple,
millivolt, voltage, and
frequency inputs. Thermo-
couple inputs are linearized
by this module.)
2
Option Slot B Module:
None.
2 Discrete Input/2 Discrete
Output (discrete inputs 3
and 4, discrete outputs 3
and 4)
0
3
Design Level A
Communications Mode:
None 0
RS-485 (allows datalink connection) 1
RS-232 (allows connection to a
personal computer or a modem)
2
Enclosure:
Standard Panel Mount Case 0
1.3 Product Specifications
The 53SL6000 controller conforms to the following
specifications and complies with the following regu-
latory requirements:
Physical Characteristics
Weight < 1.5 kg (3 lb 5 oz)
Front Dimension 72 x 144 mm
(2 53/64 x 5 43/64 in)
Overall Length With Option Modules - 130.8 mm
(5.15 in)
Without Option Modules - 85.7
mm (3 3/8 in)
Panel Installation
Panel Cutout See Figure 2-1
Installation Depth Allow an additional 25.4 mm (1
inch) for rear plug removal and
insertion.
Mounting Position Flush panel mounting 60
Degree of Protection
Facial NEMA4 (IP64)
Housing NEMA1 (IP20)
Safety Classification
CSA Approved for Class 1,
Division 2 (planned).
FM FM Approved for Class 1,
Division 2 (planned)
Environmental Limits
Operating Ambient -5 to 50C (23 to 122 F)
Temperature Limits
Storage/Transport -40 to 85C (-40 to 185 F)
Ambient
Temperature Limits
Relative Humidity Limits
Humidity Limits 5 to 95%
(operation)
Humidity Limits 5 to 100%
(storage/transport)
Barometric 82.7 to 103.4 kPa
Pressure
(operation)
Barometric 13.8 to 103.4 kPa
Pressure
(storage/transport)
Thermal Shock 20C/hr ( 68 F /hr)
(operation)
Section 1. Introduction 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
1-3
Thermal Shock 66C/hr ( 150.8 F /hr)
(storage/transport)
Physical Shock 15 g 1/2 sine, 11 ms
(operation)
Physical Shock ASTM D4169, DC1
(storage/transmit)
Vibration - 0.76 mm, 5 to 14 Hz
point-to-point 0.3 g, 14 to 200 Hz
constant
displacement
(operation)
Vibration ASTM D999
(storage/transport) B 3-100 Hz
0.5 g
Corrosion ISA S71.04, airborne contami-
nates G3 for 10 years.
ESD IEC 801-2 8.0 kV
Transient Immunity IEC 801-4,
power 4 kV direct,
signal 2 kV capacitively coupled
EM Emission CISPR Pub. 11 Class A
EMI Susceptibility SAMA PMC 33.1 - 1978
Class 3 - abc: no effect at 30 V/m,
at 27, 146, and 446 MHz;
IEC 801-3 10 V/m
Surge Withstand ANSI C37.90a - 1974/IEEE
Capability Standard 472 - 1974
Ring Wave: 1.5 MHz, 3 kV,
60 pulses/second for 2.0 seconds
AC Power
Voltage Range 93.5 to 276 V ac
Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Power Consumption 8 W/14 VA
(no options
Installed,
transmitter supply
not in use)
Power Consumption 20 W/36 VA
(options installed
transmitter supply
in use)
Permitted Voltage 20 ms
Dips
DC Power
Voltage Range 20 to 30 V dc
Power Consumption 8 W
(no options
installed
transmitter supply
not in use)
Power Consumption 15 W
(options installed
transmitter supply
in use)
Permitted Voltage 20 ms
Dips
Transmitter Supply
(referenced to power common)
Voltage Range 24 V to 26 V
Ripple 200 mVp-p
On-Load Current 50 mA (short circuit protected)
Pulsing Short 50 mA
Circuit Current
Analog Inputs 1 and 2
(referenced to power common)
Number 2, non-isolated
Rated Signal Range 0/4 to 20 mA
(for each input)
Control Range 0 to 21.5 mA
Input Impedance 250 ohm
Filter Time Constant 50 ms
Measurement Error 0.02 mA
Temperature Effects 0.002 mA/C
Discrete Inputs 1 and 2
(referenced to power common)
Number 2 (dry contacts or power contacts
up to 24 V dc)
Signal Low 0 to 1 V dc
Voltage
Signal High 4 to 24 V dc
Voltage
Input Impedance 1000 ohm
Signal Low Contact 100 ohms
(closed)
Signal High Contact 5000 ohms
(open)
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 1. Introduction
1-4
Analog Output 1
(referenced to power common)
Number 1
Rated Signal Range 0/4 to 20 mA
Control Range 0 to 21.5 mA
No-Load Voltage 24 V
Load Range 0 to 750 ohms
Filter Time Constant 50 ms
Output Measurement
Error 0.02 mA
Temperature Effects 0.002 mA/C
Discrete Outputs 1 and 2
(open drain tied to power common)
Number 2
(Contact ratings are for resistive
loads; transient suppression is re-
quired for reactive loads.)
Open (off) 1 mA leakage
Closed (on) 2.0 V dc maximum voltage drop,
50 mA maximum operating cur-
rent,
30 V dc maximum operating volt-
age, and
100 mA maximum short circuit
current
Universal Analog Input Option Module
(Isolated inputs, see Common Mode Rejection in
High/Low Level Input chart on next column)
Number Single: 1 input module,
Dual: 2 input module
Update Rate 300 msec
General Input Types Low Level - mV, RTDs,
thermocouples
High Level - voltage, current,
frequency, pulse
Input Ranges 1 to 5 V linear
1 to 5 V square root
0 to +5 V square root
0 to 80 mV
Frequency input 8 Hz - 100 kHz
Frequency input 2.5 Hz - 100 kHz
Frequency input 0.5 Hz - 30 kHz
Pulse input (incremental sum)
0-100 kHZ
Input Ranges (cont) RTD - 3 or 4 wire connection (see
list)
Thermocouple (see list)
High/Low Level Input Specifications
Low Level Input High Level Input
Input Connection Differential Differential
Input Range: 83 mV 5.3 V
Input Resistance: 10 Mohm 800 Kohm
Filter - 3db Point: 4.0 Hz no filter
Filter Response
(63%): 0.025 sec N/A
Normal Mode
Rejection:
24 db @ 60 Hz,
22 db @ 50 Hz
N/A
Common Mode
Rejection: 160 db 160 db
Common Mode
Operating: 250 V rms 250 V rms
Normal Mode
Maximum: 250 V rms < 25 V
Conversion Type: Volts to
frequency
Volts to
frequency
Resolution (17
bits plus sign): 2.5618 uV 0.1636 mV
Analog
Measurement
Error:
0.1% F.S.
25 ppm/C
0.1% F.S.
25 ppm/C
Frequency
Measurement Error 0.01%
Frequency Input Pulse, Square Wave:
Requirement +5 V, 5 usec-minimum
Sine, Triangular Wave:
10 V p-p
Pulse Measurement
Error 0%
Thermocouple Internal CJC
CJC Measurement
Error 2C
RTD List
Platinum RTDs Platinum 100 Ohm RTD
= 0.003850
-200 to +850 C
(-320 to 1560 F)
Platinum 100 Ohm RTD
= 0.003926
-200 to +870 C
(-320 to 1590 F)
Platinum 100 Ohm RTD
= 0.003911
-200 to +850 C
Section 1. Introduction 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
1-5
(-320 to 1560 F)
Copper RTDs Copper 10 Ohm RTD
= 0.00427
-200 to +260 C
(-320 to 500 F)
Copper 53 Ohm RTD
= 0.00427
-50 to +150 C
(-55 to 300 F)
Copper 100 Ohm RTD
= 0.00427
-100 to + 260 C
(-150 to 500 F)
Nickel RTDs Nickel 100 Ohm RTD
= 0.00618
-60 to +180 C
(-80 to 350 F)
Nickel 120 Ohm RTD
= 0.00672
-80 to +273 C
(-110 to 520 F)
Thermocouple List
J Fe/Cu-Ni
-200 to +1200 C
(-325 to 2190 F)
K Ni-Chrom/Ni-Al
-200 to +1370 C
(-320 to 2490 F)
T Cu/Cu-Ni
-250 to +400 C
(-418 to 750 F)
E Ni-Chrom/Cu-Ni
-260 to +1000 C
(436 to 1830 F)
N Ni-14%Chrom-1.4%Si/Ni-4.4%Si
-0.1%Mg
-200 to +1300 C
(-320 to 2370 F)
C Tungsten-5%Rhenium/Tungsten
-26%Rhenium
0 to +2320 C
(32 to 4200 F)
R Pt-13%Rhodium/Pt
0 to +1765 C
(32 to 3200 F)
S Pt-10%Rhodium/Pt
0 to +1765 C
(32 to 3200 F)
B Pt-30%Rhodium/Pt-6%Rhodium
+20 to +1820 C
(68 to 3300 F)
L Fe/Cu-Ni
-200 to +900 C
(-320 to 1650 F)
U Cu/Cu-Ni
-200 to +600 C
(-325 to 1110 F)
CHE Ni-Chrom/Cu-Ni (Chinese E)
-50 to +800 C
(-50 to 1470 F)
CHS Pt-10%Rhodium/Pt (Chinese S)
0 to +1600 C
(32 to 2900 F)
F 0 to +1400 C
(32 to 2550 F)
G Tungsten/Tungsten-26%Rhenium
20 to +2320 C
(68 to 4200 F)
D Tungsten-3%Rhenium/Tungsten
-25%Rhenium
0 to +2320 C
(32 to 4200 F)
PLII Au-Pt-Palladium/Au-Pall
(Platinel II)
-100 to +1395 C
(-140 to 2540 F)
2DI/2DO Option Module
Discrete Inputs 2
Signal Low, Voltage 0 to 1 V dc
Signal High, Voltage 4 to 24 V dc
Input Impedance 1000 ohms
Signal Low Contact 100 ohms
Signal High Contact 5000 ohms (minimum
recognition 10 ms)
Discrete Outputs 2 (Form C Relays)
Contact Load 250 V switching voltage,
5 A switching current, and
1250 VA-ac,
30 W at 250 V dc, and
100 W at 24 V dc
switching power
Life Expentancy 20,000,000 mechanical switching
operations and 2,000,000 electri-
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 1. Introduction
1-6
cal 24 V/4 A ohmic Amp switching
operations
Spark Suppressor In series 5nF/51 ohm with varistor
420 Veff in parallel
Electrical Isolation 1000 V contact coil
1000 V contact-contact
1000 V between relays
CPU Cycle Time
Input Sample Rate 50 ms
Output Update Rate 50 ms
Display Update Rate 50 ms
Control Ranges
Proportional (P) 1000% - 2%
Integral (I) 200 min/repeat - 0.02 min/repeat,
0 is off.
Derivative (D) 8 min - 0.01 min, 0 is off
Display
Element Type Red, green, and yellow LEDs
Digital Readouts 8.9 mm in height
two 4 digit, 7 segment digital
readouts
one 3 digit, 7 segment digital
readouts
Analog Bar Graphs two columns of 40 LEDs
80.7 mm in height
4.8 mm in width
0 to 100% range
2.5% bargraph
operation resolution
red PV LEDs
green SP LEDs
LED Indicators twelve LEDs: red, green, yellow
Keypad Seven positive tactile-feel keys
Section 1. Introduction 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
1-7
2.1 Inspection
Inspect the equipment upon arrival for damage that
may have occurred during shipment. If damage is
such that faulty operation is likely to result, do not
install the controller and contact the ABB Automat-
ion representative if purchased direct, or contact
the appropriate supplier for repair/replacement pro-
cedures. Inspect the packing material before dis-
carding it to prevent the loss of any additional
product literature that may have been included in
the shipment. Also inspect the controller data tag
to ensure it has the correct power requirements for
the intended application (e.g., 120/240 V ac or 24 V
dc).
2.2 Site Location
The 53SL6000 controller is designed to operate on
a plant floor where the controller faceplate might be
exposed to occassional wash-downs. See Section
1.3 for the stated environmental specifications of
the controller.
2.3 Panel Mounting
Dimensions for single and multi-controller mount-
ing in a single panel cutout are provided in Figure
2-1.
2.3.1 Single Cutout Installation
(NEMA4 Compliant)
1. From the rear of the controller, slide on the
rubber O-ring so that it butts against the dis-
play flange.
2. The applicable option modules can be installed
now, before the controller is mounted in the
panel cutout, or after mounting. If installing the
option modules now, see Figure 2-7 to install
the universal analog input module, Figure 2-9
to install the 2DI/2DO module, and Figure 2-
12 to install the RS-232 or RS-485 module.
This step can be skipped if none of these mod-
ules were ordered with the controller.
3. Slide the controller through the panel cutout
and secure it in place using the two mounting
brackets as shown in Figure 2-1.
2.3.2 Multiple Cutout Installation
Multi-controller mounting collar part numbers are
provided in Table B-1, Parts List.
1. If it is desired to cushion the controller from the
collar, then slide on the rubber O-ring from the
rear of the controller so that it butts against the
display flange. This step is optional and not
required.
2. The applicable option modules can be installed
before each controller is mounted in the panel
cutout, or after mounting. If installing the op-
tion modules now, see Figure 2-7 to install the
universal analog input module, Figure 2-9 to
install the 2DI/2DO module, and Figure 2-12
to install the RS-232 or RS-485 module.
This step can be skipped if none of these mod-
ules were ordered with the controllers.
3. Slide each controller through the mounting col-
lar and panel cutout. Secure each controller in
place using the two mounting brackets as
shown in Figure 2-1.
2.4 Power Connections
Figure 2-2 illustrates the power plug location on the
controller backplane. The power plug is removable
and can be pulled straight out from its backplane
connector. The plug is scalloped on one side to
ensure proper insertion after the power wires are
connected.
WARNING: Instruments that are powered from an
ac line service constitute a potential electric shock
hazard to the user; therefore, only qualified
technicians should install the unit. Make certain
that the ac power lines are disconnected from the
operating branch circuit before attempting
electrical connections.
NOTE: Installations are expected to have access
to a high quality, noise-free point of earth
reference. Connection should be through a low
resistance (less than one ohm) lead wire directly
to the installations point of earth reference which
can be an independent grounding rod or ground
grid mesh that penetrates the permanent moisture
level below the frost line in accordance with Article
250 of ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical
Code, or other code(s) acceptable to the authority
having jurisdiction over the installation.
NOTE: In electrically noisy locations, use shielded
signal wiring. Also, the power wiring should not
be routed in close proximity to signal wiring.
NOTE: Each power wire lead should be stripped
to expose 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) conductor.
2.0 Installation and Power-Up Procedures
Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
2-1
Figure 2-1. Panel Cutout and Installation
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

2
.


I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

P
o
w
e
r
-
U
p

P
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
s
2
-
2
Figure 2-2. Power Plug
2.4.1 24 V DC Power Connections
Figure 2-3. 24 V DC Power Connections
Refer to Figure 2-3 to make the following connec-
tions:
1. Connect the positive (+) 24 V input line, via an
SPST switch, to L1 of the power plug. As
shown in Figure 2-3, the positive input should
come from a distribution strip; do not daisy-
chain the input power from one controller to
another. Leave the SPST switch in the OFF
position.
2. Connect the negative (-) input line to L2 of the
power plug. As shown in Figure 2-3, the nega-
tive input should come from a distribution strip;
do not daisy-chain the negative input from one
controller to another. The distribution strip
should be connected to a noise free earth ref-
erence as shown in Figure 2-3.
3. Connect the chassis safety ground lug of the
power plug to the ground wire.
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE
CONTROLLER.
(Applying power is performed in Section 2.9.)
2.4.2 AC Power Connections
Figure 2-4. AC Power Connections
Refer to Figure 2-4 to make the following connec-
tions:
1. For 110/120/220 V ac, connect the phase and
neutral inputs to the power plug. For 240 V ac,
connect the two phase inputs to the power
plug.
2. Connect the chassis safety ground lug of the
power plug to the ground wire (green, green-
yellow).
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE
CONTROLLER.
(Applying power is performed in Section 2.9.)
2.5 Signal Connections
Figure 2-5 illustrates the signal plug location on the
controller backplane. The signal plug is removable
and can be pulled straight out from its backplane
connector. The plug is scalloped on one side to
ensure proper insertion after the signal wires are
connected. Figure 2-6 illustrates the signal wire
connections.
NOTE: Each signal wire lead should be stripped
to expose 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) conductor.
Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
2-3
Figure 2-5. Signal Plug
Figure 2-6. Signal Plug Connections
NOTE 1: Shielded signal cable (two-wire) should
be used in electrically noisy locations.
NOTE 2: Signal transmission distance must not
exceed the limit specified for the particular
transmitter (refer to the applicable technical
literature provided with the respective device).
NOTE 3: Correct polarity must be observed when
connecting remote transmitters to the controller.
2.5.1 Analog Inputs AI1 and AI2
In Figure 2-6, AI1 is connected to a transmitter that
requires power from the controller. Both, AI1
and/or AI2 can be connected to transmitters that
require controller power provided the total required
power does not exceed the specifications stated for
the transmitter supply in Section 1.3. The current
path for AI1 is from +24V to the + transmitter input,
through the transmitter element, out of the trans-
mitter (-), to the AI1 plug connection, across the
internal 250 ohm (0.1%) voltage dropping resistor,
and down to Common.
In Figure 2-6, AI2 is connected to a transmitter type
that has its own power source and does not require
power from the controller. This transmitter type
can be connected to both AI1 and/or AI2. The
current path for AI2 is from the transmitter current
out (Io), to the AI2 plug connection, across the
internal 250 ohm (0.1%) voltage dropping resistor,
out the plug Common connection, to the transmitter
Common connection.
Notice in Figure 2-6 that the signal cable shields
are connected to the backplane shield stud.
2.5.2 Discrete Outputs DO1 and DO2
Only DO1 is shown connected in Figure 2-6; con-
nections to DO2 are identical. A discrete output
resistive load does not require transient suppres-
sion; however, reactive loads do to prevent coil
ringing or spiking from feeding back into the con-
troller. The required diode shown as the suppres-
sion device is circuit dependent (typical: a 24V, 430
ohm, dc coil relay would require a 1N4003 diode).
2.5.3 Discrete Inputs DI1 and DI2
Only DI2 is shown connected in Figure 2-6; con-
nections to DI1 are identical. In the figure, the
discrete input solid state circuitry is depicted as a
signal contact that opens or closes (logic states) in
response to input voltage levels (the discrete inputs
also work with dry contacts: 100 ohms is closed
and 5000 ohms is open).
2.5.4 Analog Output AO1
In Figure 2-6, the control output device is con-
nected across the AO1 and COM lugs. Signal cur-
rent passes from the AO1 connection, through the
device and back to Common. Control output de-
vice response to alter process operation is de-
penedent upon the analog signal amplitude.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures
2-4
2.6 Universal Analog Input Module
This information applies to only those controllers
with an optional universal analog input module.
2.6.1 Universal Analog Input Module
Backplane Installation
Figure 2-7 illustrates the universal analog input
module location on the controller backplane. The
universal input module is socket mounted and is
secured to the backplane with two screws. Also
shown in Figure 2-7 are the signal plugs AI3 (right
plug) and AI4 (left plug) that are screw mounted to
the universal analog input module (the plug mount-
ing screws are not illustrated). Depending on the
option ordered, one (AI3) or both (AI3 and AI4) of
these plugs will require installation and input con-
nections. The plugs for AI3 and AI4 are identical;
therefore, care should be taken to ensure each
plug is installed in its proper location. Each plug,
however, is keyed to prevent inverted insertion into
its module connector.
Figure 2-7. Universal Analog Input Module
2.6.2 Universal Analog Input Module
Signal Wiring
As shown in Figure 2-7 (e.g., INSERT SCREW-
DRIVER), the signal wire lug screws are accessed
on the side of each plug.
Each analog input (AI3 and AI4) can accept only
one device input configuration as illustrated in Fig-
ure 2-8. Unused plug lugs can not be dedicated
to another input.
2.6.2.1 Thermocouple Connections and
Burn-out Detection
To ensure proper col d j uncti on compensati on
(CJC) operation, the steps to wire a thermocouple
to the universal analog input module are as follows:
1. Prepare the thermocouple leads as shown in
the following illustration:
2. For dual universal analog input modules that
will have one thermocouple connected, ensure
it is installed on AI3 and that the other input is
installed on AI4.
3. For dual universal analog input modules that
will have only one terminal plug connected, the
other terminal plug must still be installed on the
module for proper performance.
4. Thermocouple Burn-out Detection - As
shown in Figure 2-8, an open thermocouple
detection (OTD) current, which is very small, is
provided at pin 3 of each connector plug. If pin
3 is wired to pin 1 and the thermocouple opens,
then a positive temperature over range results.
If pin 3 is wired to pin 2 and the thermocouple
opens, then a negative temperature over range
results.
NOTE: If an upscale or downscale open
thermocouple detection (OTD) wire is installed as
part of the thermocouple connection, then the wire
should be 2 inches (50.8 mm) of 22AWG wire or
lighter. Do not use longer or heavier gauge (e.g.,
14AWG) wire.
5. The complete assembly will reach thermal
equilibrium approximately 30 minutes after the
controller is powered up (see Section 2.9, Ap-
plying Power).
Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
2-5
Figure 2-8. Input Configurations
2.7 2DI/2DO Module
This information applies to only those controllers
with the optional 2DI/2DO module.
2.7.1 2DI/2DO Backplane Installation
Figure 2-9 illustrates the 2DI/2DO module location
on the controller backplane. The 2DI/2DO module
is socket mounted and is secured to the backplane
with two screws. Also shown in Figure 2-9 are the
2DI and 2DO signal plugs that are screw mounted
to the module (the plug mounting screws are not
illustrated). The two plugs are different in size;
therefore, they can not be inadvertently installed in
the wrong sockets and each plug is keyed to pre-
vent inverted insertion into its module socket.
Figure 2-9. 2DI/2DO Module
2.7.2 2DI/2DO Signal Wiring
As shown in Figure 2-9 (e.g., INSERT SCREW-
DRIVER), the lug adjusting screws are accessed
on the side of the plug.
Signal input connections for the 2DI four terminal
plug are illustrated in Figure 2-10. The functional
description for DI3 and DI4 is identical to that de-
scribed in Section 2.5.3 for DI1 and DI2.
Figure 2-10. 2DI Plug Connections
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures
2-6
Signal input connections for the 2DO six terminal
plug are illustrated in Figure 2-11. Both, DO1 and
DO2 are Form C relays. The contact load capaci-
ties are 250 V ac or 250 V dc maximum switching
voltage; 5 A switching current; 1250 VA-ac maxi-
mum, and 30 W at 250 V-DC maximum or 100 W at
24 V-DC maximum switching power.
NOTE: The 2DI/2DO module provides line
suppression; appropriate load suppression must
be supplied by the user.
Figure 2-11. 2DO Plug Connections
2.8 RS-232 and RS-485 Modules
This information applies to only those controllers
with the optional RS-232 module or RS-485 mod-
ule.
Figure 2-12 illustrates the RS-232 module or the
RS-485 module location on the controller back-
plane. The module is socket mounted and is se-
cured to the backplane with a screw. Also shown in
Figure 2-12 is the module signal plug, which is
keyed to prevent inverted insertion in its socket.
As shown in Figure 2-12 (e.g., INSERT SCREW-
DRIVER AT BASE), the lug adjusting screws are
accessed at the bottom of the plug.
Figure 2-12. RS-232 or RS-485 Module
2.8.1 RS-232 Plug Connections
Signal connections to the RS-232 module plug are
illustrated in Figure 2-13. Transmitted (TxD) and
received (RxD) signals are with respect to the con-
troller.
Figure 2-13. RS-232 Plug Connections
2.8.2 RS-485 Plug Connections
Signal connections to the RS-485 module plug are
illustrated in Figure 2-14. In the illustration, the
controller is shown wired as a drop on the datalink.
Two wires are therefore connected to each lug:
one set (T+, T-, R+, R-, SC) that comes from the
previous node and another set that is connected to
the next datalink node.
Figure 2-14. RS-485 Plug Connections
NOTE: Cable shield should be connected to
ground at only one location.
2.9 Applying Power
Verify all controller connections and ensure each
connection is mechanically sound before closing
the power switch to apply controller power. The
Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
2-7
controller powers up in the last state it was in be-
fore power was removed.
2.9.1 Power-up Sequence
The power-up sequence is as follows:
1. At power-up, the controller performs a power-
on self test which includes lighting all faceplate
LEDs for three seconds to show they are work-
ing.
2. After completing the power-on self test, status
information is presented in the dros. During
status, both of the vertical bars have five
equally spaced LEDs lit.
2a. If the power-on self test is successful, the
dros wi l l contai n opt i on i dent i f i cat i on
codes and the firmware revision level iden-
tification for the next three seconds as de-
scribed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1. Controller Status Codes
dro Attribute Status Code
Top (red) Option A status
code.
0 = no options.
192 = 2DI/2DO.
193 = Single Univer-
sal Analog Input.
194 = Dual Univer-
sal Analog Input.
Middle
(green)
Option B status
code.
Bottom
(yellow)
Firmware revision
level identifier.
Code must be cross
referenced to
revision level.
2b. If a power-on self-test database memory
error occurs, the nrAM error appears in
the top (red) dro and the controller halts
further operati on. Return unit to ABB
Automation or distributor, as applicable.
3. After a successful power-on sel f test and
status presentation, the controller enters op-
erator mode, unless it was offline or executing
the controller confidence test when it was pow-
ered-down.
Offline is indicated by four equally spaced
pairs of lit LEDs in the green vertical bar.
When offline, no control is being performed
and all outputs are held at their values pre-
vious to being placed in offline mode. (For
more information about operator mode see
Section 3.2, Operator Mode; for more informa-
tion about the offline state, see Section 3.7,
Offline Display Pattern.)
Reference Section B.4.6, Exiting the Controller
Confidence Test via the Faceplate Push Buttons, if
it is suspected that the controller was executing the
controller confidence tests when it was powered-
down. Both vertical bars and all status indicator
LEDs, except the WD indicator, will be lit during the
controller confidence test execution.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 2. Installation and Power-Up Procedures
2-8
3.1 Display Panel Overview
As shown in Figure 3-1, the controller display panel
contains three digital read-out (dro) fields, two ver-
tical bar indicators, twelve function specific status
indicators, and seven push buttons (pbs). The dis-
play panel is used to alter controller settings (which
in turn affect process operation), to monitor proc-
ess operation, and to configure controller function-
ality. (It is also used to commission the controller,
which is described in Section 9.) Process opera-
tion is altered and monitored with the controller in
operator mode; controller functionality is config-
ured with the controller in engineer mode.
Figure 3-1. Display Panel Overview
3.2 Operator Mode
The colors red, green, and yellow are used to visu-
ally partition the display panel into general operat-
ing mode functional areas as follows:
red - process variable presentation.
green - setpoint presentation and control.
yellow - output presentation and control.
Red: The red display area includes the left vertical
bar, upper dro, and alarm status indicators (A1,
A2). This display area is assigned to the process
variable input. The red vertical bar indicates the
process variable as a percent of control range and
the red dro is the process variable in engineering
units.
Green: The green display area includes the right
vertical bar, the dro immediately beneath it, the
remote/local pb with its two status indicators, and
the setpoint up/down pbs. This display area is usu-
ally assigned to setpoint indication and control, al-
though the green vertical bar and dro can be used
to indicate a second process variable if the se-
lected control scheme is an indicator. The green
vertical bar indicates the setpoint as a percent of
control range and the green dro is the value in
engineering units.
Yellow: The yellow display area includes the bot-
tom dro, the auto/manual pb with its status indica-
tors, the output pbs, and the two multistate (MS1,
MS2) indicators. This display area is primarily as-
signed to output indication and control. The yellow
dro is an output value in percent of the scaled final
control element travel range.
3.2.1 Operator Mode Panel Functions
The operator mode panel functions are described
in Figure 3-2 on the next page. The figure has
three major parts: an illustration of the controller
with item number call-outs in the upper right, a
supporting chart in the upper left that defines the
Off/On/Blinking status indicator states, and a sum-
mary chart at the bottom that lists the assigned
functions of each item call-out by control scheme.
The illustration item call-outs are defined in more
detail in Table 3-1.
As shown in Figure 3-2, many of the push buttons
and status indicators have identical functions in the
different control schemes; however, the indica-
tor/l oader (i n.Ld) control scheme i s the most
unique.
3.0 Display Panel
Section 3. Display Panel 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
3-1
Item/LED Off On Blink-
ing
Description
8 - R X Remote/Ratio.
X Remote requested, but
not granted (Remote
Enable [RE] not true).
9 - L X Local Setpoint.
X Setpoint is tracking the
SP tracking signal.
3 - A1
4 - A2
X No alarm.
X Alarm active.
24 - Watch-
dog
X Normal operation.
X Out of service.
21 - Loop 1 X Loop 1 selected (cASc,
L.LiM, h.LiM).
22 - Loop 2 X Loop 2 selected (cASc,
L.LiM, h.LiM).
23 - Easy-
Tune
X Not running Easy-Tune.
X Failed Easy-Tune.
X Running Easy-Tune.
14 - Auto X In Auto.
X Auto requested but not
granted - (Auto Enable
[AE] not true.)
15 - Manual X In Manual.
X Output is tracking the
Force Output signal.
18, 19 -
MS1, MS2
Alternately on/off for time proportioned
or three step output.
Item SnGL
Control
cASc Control L.LiM/h.LiM Control in.Ld
PV(1)=PV/PV1
Secondary (L1) Primary (L2) Primary (Loop 1) Limiting (Loop 2)
1 PV dro PV dro PV dro PV dro PV dro PV(1) dro
2 PV bar PV bar PV bar PV bar PV bar PV(1) bar
3 PV Alarm 1 status PV Alarm 1 status PV Alarm 1 status PV Alarm 1 status PV Alarm 1 status PV(1) Alarm 1
4 PV Alarm 2 status PV Alarm 2 status PV Alarm 2 status PV Alarm 2 status PV Alarm 2 status PV(1) Alarm 2
5 Setpoint* dro Setpoint* dro Setpoint dro Setpoint* dro Setpoint dro Auto/PV2 dro
6 Setpoint bar Setpoint bar Setpoint bar Setpoint bar Setpoint bar Auto/PV2 bar
7 R/L pb R/L pb N/A R/L pb N/A N/A
8 Remote LED Remote status N/A Remote status N/A N/A
9 Local LED Local status N/A Local status N/A N/A
10 SP Up pb SP Up pb SP Up pb SP Up pb SP Up pb N/A
11 SP Down pb SP Down pb SP Down pb SP Down pb SP Down pb N/A
12 Out dro Out dro Out dro Out dro Out dro Auto/PV2 Xmt dro
13 Auto/Manual pb Auto/Man. pb Auto/Man. pb Auto/Man. pb Auto/Man. pb Auto/Manual pb
14 Auto LED Auto status Auto status Auto status Auto status Auto status
15 Manual LED Manual status Manual status Manual status Manual status Manual status
16 Decrease Out pb Decr. Out pb Decr. Out pb Decr. Out pb Decr. Out pb Decrease Out pb
17 Increase Out pb Incr. Out pb Incr. Out pb Incr. Out pb Incr. Out pb Increase Out pb
18 Multistate 1 Multistate 1 N/A Multistate 1 N/A Multistate 1
19 Multistate 2 Multistate 2 N/A Multistate 2 N/A Multistate 2
20 Mode pb Mode pb, Loop 1/2 Select pb Mode pb, Loop 1/2 Select pb Mode pb
21 N/A Loop 1 select Loop 1 select N/A
22 N/A Loop 2 select Loop 2 select N/A
23 Easy-Tune status N/A
24 Watchdog condition indicator
*Ratio based on conF-cn.1-SPM setting.
Figure 3-2. Operator Mode Display Panel Summary
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 3. Display Panel
3-2
Table 3-1. Operator Mode Display Items
Item Call-Out Description
1 PV dro It is the process variable
value in engineering units.
2 PV bar It indicates the process
variable percent of control
range.
3 PV Alarm 1
Status
When active, it indicates
alarm 1 of the selected
alarm index limits (e.g.
high/low alarms; high, high-
high alarms; etc.) was not
within tolerable limits.
For high/low alarms, an
active Alarm 1 LED
indicates the the PV
exceeded the high
alarmed value.
4 PV Alarm 2
Status
When active, it indicates
alarm 2 of the selected
alarm index limits (e.g.
high/low alarms; low, low-
low alarms; etc.) was not
within tolerable limits. For
high/low alarms, an active
Alarm 2 LED indicates the
PV fell below the low
alarmed value.
5 Setpoint dro It is the setpoint value in
engineering units or a ratio
setpoint.
6 Setpoint bar It indicates the setpoint
percent of control range.
It also produces a striped
pattern when the
controller is offline.
7 R/L
Push
Button
Generally, it is used to
select the setpoint source:
remote or local setpoint
control. Remote setpoint
control requires an active
Remote Enable. For ratio
control, it is used to select
ratio or standard control.
8 Remote
Setpoint
Status
It indicates remote
setpoint is selected with
the R/L push button. See
item 7 above and the LED
chart in Figure 3-2.
9 Local
Setpoint
Status
It indicates the local or
tracking setpoint is
selected with the R/L push
button. See item 7 above
and the LED chart in Figure
3-2.
10 Setpoint
Up
Push
Button
Pressing this push button
increases the local
setpoint or ratio setpoint
value. See Table 3-2 for
setpoint mode selections.
Table 3-1. Operator Mode Display Items
Item Call-Out Description
11 Setpoint
Down pb
Pressing this push button
decreases the local
setpoint or ratio setpoint
value. See Table 3-2 for
setpoint mode selections.
12 Out dro It is the control output as a
percent of control range.
It can also be used to
display an externally
generated signal such as a
proportional speed
floating control valve
position indication.
13 A/M
Push
Button
It is used to select auto or
manual control. If auto is
selected and Auto Enable
is active, then the output is
determined by the
controller PID algorithm. If
manual is selected, the
output is determined by
the decrease/increase out
push buttons.
14 Auto
Status
It indicates auto operation
is selected with the A/M
push button. See the LED
chart in Figure 3-2.
15 Manual
Status
It indicates manual
operation is selected with
the A/M push button. See
the LED chart in Figure 3-2.
16 Decrease Out
Push
Button
When in manual
operation, pressing this
push button causes the
output to decrease.
17 Increase Out
Push
Button
When in manual
operation, pressing this
push button causes the
output to increase.
18 Multistate 1
Indicators
These two indicators
activate to show the
direction of the discrete
control output.
19 Multistate 2
Indicators
Section 3. Display Panel 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
3-3
Table 3-1. Operator Mode Display Items
Item Call-Out Description
20 Select Mode
and Loop 1/2
Push Button
Pressing this push
button in operator
mode with an active
two loop control
scheme (cASc, L.LiM, or
h.LiM) selects the loop
under display panel
control. It toggles from
one loop to the other
each time it is pressed.
If this push button is
held for three seconds,
it causes engineer
mode to be entered.
Pressing it in engineer
mode causes a return
to operator mode.
21 Loop 1
Select
Indicator
These indicators are for
the two loop control
schemes cASc, L.LiM,
and h.LiM. Either one
of these two indicators
will activate to show
which loop is under
display panel control
as selected by the
Mode push button.
22 Loop 2
Select
Indicator
23 Easy-Tune
Status
This status indicator
blinks during Easy-Tune
operation. A steady-
state-on condition
indicates Easy-Tune
terminated with an
error. It stops blinking
when Easy-Tune
completes successfully.
24 Watchdog
Condition
Indicator
This indicator activates
whenever the
controller detects an
internal processor
failure. When active,
all outputs are forced
to their power-off state.
Attempt to restart the
controller by cycling
power.
Table 3-2. Setpoint Up/Down Push Buttons
Display Panel Action
R/L PB (7)
SPM*
R LED
(8)
L LED
(9)
Alter standard SP value. Y Std
No SP control. Y Std
Alter standard SP value. Y K-SP
Alter ratio SP value. Y K-SP
*SPM settings (Std or K-SP) are made in engineer
mode, which is described later in Section 3.
3.3 Auxiliary Operator Access
To facilitate operator access for auxiliary data input
and selected parameter modification, an engineer
mode oPEr menu is provided. This menu allows
display panel entry of logical and analog signal
constants, process variable alarm values, high/low
output limit values, and PID values. It also pro-
vides operator capabilities to execute the Easy-
Tune sequence. Access t o menu i t ems i s
controlled through the conF-oPr enabling parame-
ters. Because the oPEr menu parameters and their
corresponding conF-oPr enabling parameters are
accessed in engineer mode, they are described in
Tables 3-3 and 3-4, which appear later as part of
the engineer mode information.
3.4 Operator Mode Overflow/
Underflow Indication
Overflow indicators are plus signs (+) and under-
flow indicators are negative signs (-). Illustrations
of the overflow and underflow conditions are pro-
vided in Figure 3-3. They appear in the affected
dro and are decimal point sensitive. If these indica-
tors repeatedly appear, the decimal point should be
repositioned with the conF-cn.1(cn.2)-dP parame-
ter described in Table 7-3. Adjusting this parame-
ter requires knowledge of engineer mode, which is
described next in this section.
Figure 3-3. Overflow/Underflow Indicators
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 3. Display Panel
3-4
3.5 Engineer Mode
The controller parameters and path connections
are configured in engineer mode. Engineer mode
is also used to initiate the Easy-Tune sequence
(see Section 9.8). This mode is entered when the
mode push button is held pressed for an extended
period of approximately 3 seconds, at which time
the oPEr menu prompt appears in the green dro.
3.5.1 Engineer Mode Display Panel
The display panel functions for engineer mode are
described in Figure 3-4 as follows:
Figure 3-4. Engineer Mode Display Panel
3.5.2 Engineer Mode Hieracrhical
Structure
Engineer mode is a hierarchical structure of nested
prompt layers that can be four levels deep; the
general order of selection is:
Level 1, Menu - After engineer mode is ac-
cessed with the mode push button, each menu
prompt can be displayed sequentially by press-
ing the scroll forward pb. The menu prompts
are three major display panel paths: oPEr,
ProG, and conF. The ProG and conF paths
can each be protected with their own unique
pass-key. The three menu prompts are de-
scribed as follows:
1. oPEr (operator) - provides quick access
for operators to display and configure com-
mon parameters such as alarm l imits,
deadband, etc. (This path skips level 2,
module described below.)
2. ProG (Program) - is selected to enter reg-
ister values, formula constants, and to
make path connections. Parameters en-
tered in this menu will force the controller
offline. It is used primarily by engineering
personnel.
3. conF (Configure) - is selected to configure
online database parameters; it is used pri-
marily by engineering personnel.
Level 2, Module Select - used to select a spe-
cific controller functional element (e.g., the
prompt Ai.1 for analog input 1). The full path
name is indicated by menu-module (e.g., conF-
Ai.1). The module selection is skipped in the
oPEr menu path.
Level 3, Parameter Select - used to select a
specific parameter from a list of module pa-
rameters (e.g., the parameter prompt SPAn un-
der Ai.1). The full path name is indicated by
menu-modul e-paramet er (e. g. , conF-Ai .1-
SPAn).
Level 4, Edit - this is where a value is entered
for the displayed parameter or a selection from
a list of values or mnemonics is made.
3.5.2.1 Editing a Parameter
Figure 3-5 illustrates the steps to edit a parameter
in engineer mode. In the illustration a parameter
selection is made; some parameters require a nu-
meric value to be entered. The process to edit a
parameter is reiterative:
When engineer mode is entered, the oPEr
menu prompt (level 1) appears in the green
dro. The menu prompts are scrolled and one
is selected.
Selecting a menu prompt causes the first mod-
ule prompt (level 2) to appear in the yellow dro.
The module prompts of the selected menu are
scrolled and one is selected.
Selecting a module prompt causes the first pa-
rameter prompt (level 3) to appear; it replaces
the menu prompt in the green dro. The pa-
rameter prompts of the selected module are
scrolled and one is selected.
Selecting a parameter prompt causes the first
edit entry prompt (level 4) to appear in the red
dro. An edit input list is scrolled and an item is
selected or a numeric value is entered.
Section 3. Display Panel 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
3-5
Figure 3-5. Editing a Parameter
NOTE 1: There is a 12.5 second time-out that
occurs if a parameter prompt is not selected in
engineer mode.
NOTE 2: oPEr and conF parameter changes take
affect immediately. If a ProG menu parameter is
edited, the controller goes to the offline condition
in which no control action is performed.
3.5.2.2 Deselecting and Scrolling
Backward
Figure 3-6 illustrates how to move through the vari-
ous modules and their parameters by using the
deselect and scroll backward push buttons. Figure
3-6 begins with the last level 4 edit select step in
Figure 3-5 where the bASE parameter of the Ai.2
module was updated. The object in Figure 3-6 is to
exit the Ai.2 module after the bASE parameter has
been updated and to access the Ai.1 module where
any one of its parameters can be scrolled and se-
lected for updating.
3.5.2.3 Editing a Numeric Value
If a parameter value must be entered in the red dro,
different editing steps must be performed than
when a selection is made from an item list. Figure
3-7 illustrates these steps; it assumes engineer
mode has been entered, and the menu, module,
and parameter have been selected. The parameter
conF-Ai.1-SPAn will be edited from 100.0 to 275.0.
Only the red dro showing the conF-Ai.1-SPAn
value appears in the illustration.
Figure 3-8 illustrates changing the conF-Ai.1-SPAn
value from 100.0 to 10.00 by moving the decimal
point. It assumes engineer mode has been en-
tered, and the menu, module, and parameter have
been selected.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 3. Display Panel
3-6
Figure 3-6. Deselecting and Scrolling
Backward
Figure 3-7. Editing a Red dro Value
Figure 3-8. Moving the Red dro Decimal
Point
3.5.2.4 Editing the Tag Parameter
The tAG is one parameter where an alphanumeric,
rather than a numeric, can be entered. It occurs
when the datalink controller conF-SYS-tAG pa-
rameter must be configured. Because four charac-
ters maximum can be displayed at any one time in
the red dro, using the shift right push button in
engineer mode allows the ten character positions
to be displayed as follows:
0123 3456 6789
The bold characters are those that can be changed
with each four position display.
Characters are selected for each position with the
scroll forward/backward push buttons in a manner
described in Figure 3-7. The procedure to edit the
tag is described in Figure 3-9. It assumes the
conF-SYS-tAG parameter is already accessed.
Section 3. Display Panel 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
3-7
Figure 3-9. Editing a tAG
3.6 Entering a Pass-Key
In engineering mode, access to the ProG and conF
menus can be selectively restricted, as each menu
has its own pass-key capabilities. A pass-key is a
four digit number that must be entered when a
menu is selected; otherwise, access to module
prompts in that menu are prohibited. Figure 3-10
illustrates the key display that appears if a menu is
pass-key protected.
Figure 3-10. KEY? Prompt
The correct pass-key must be entered in the red
dro with the following procedure:
1. Press the scroll forward pb until the desired
number for the first digit appears (assumes
first digit is not a zero).
2. Press the position select right pb; the second
zero starts blinking.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all four pass-key
digits.
4. Press the enter pb; if the pass-key is correct
engineer mode functions are permitted for that
menu.
NOTE: If the pass-key can not be recalled, then
the database must be defaulted using the
procedure described in Section B.5.
3.6.1 Configuring a Pass-Key
To configure a conF (or ProG) pass-key, the follow-
ing steps must be performed:
1. Enter engineer mode by pressing and holding
the mode pb until a menu prompt appears in
the green dro.
2. Press the scroll forward pb until conF (ProG)
appears in the green dro.
3. Press the enter pb to accept the conF (ProG)
menu.
4. If KEY does not appear in the yellow dro, press
the scroll forward pb until it does.
5. Press the enter pb to select the KEY prompt.
cKEY (PKEY) appears in the green dro.
It is assumed the pass-key was never config-
ured before and that four zeros appear in the
red dro:
6. Press the enter pb; the leftmost number (zero)
in the red dro blinks.
7. Press the scroll forward pb until the desired
number appear s ( assumes zer o wi l l be
changed to a different number).
8. Press the shift right pb; the next zero starts
blinking.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all four pass-key
digits are entered.
10. Press the enter pb to enter the pass-key.
11. Press the mode pb to exit engineer mode.
3.7 Offline Display Pattern
The controller offline state is indicated by four acti-
vated double LED markers along the green vertical
bar as shown in Figure 3-11. The remainder of the
vertical bar is dark.
Events that can cause the controller to be offline
are as follows:
If a ProG menu parameter is altered in engi-
neer mode , it causes the controller to immedi-
ately go offline,
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 3. Display Panel
3-8
If exiting the conF or ProG menus in engineer
mode, the controller goes offline and a blinking
oFF prompt appears in the red dro immediately
after the mode pb is pressed. To put the con-
troller in operator mode, press the scroll for-
ward pb to change the oFF prompt to the run
prompt and press the enter pb.
The controller may have been powered-down
in offline, in which case it will return to offline
after the status and power-on self test se-
quence is complete. To put the controller in
operator mode if an offline indication occurs
after the power-up sequence, perform the fol-
lowing steps:
1. press and hold the mode pb until a menu
item (conF, oPEr, or ProG) appears.
2. Use the scroll forward push button to dis-
play the ProG or conF menu prompts and
press the select push button.
3. Press the mode pb; the oFF prompt ap-
pears blinking in the red dro.
4. To put the controller in operator mode,
press the scroll forward pb to change the
oFF prompt to the run prompt and press
the enter pb.
Figure 3-11. Offline Display Pattern
3.8 Engineer Mode oPEr Selections
This menu provides operator access to selected
parameters and auxiliary inputs. Items not enabled
from the oPr module of the conF menu will not
appear in the oPEr menu. The oPEr parameters
and auxiliary inputs are described in Table 3-3 and
their enabling parameters are described in Table
3-4 as follows:
Table 3-3. oPEr Menu Selections
Prompt Description Dft
di7 Discrete Input 7
It provides enumerated selections,
StoP and run, that can be used to
implement general purpose logic
states.
StoP - 0
run - 1
(It is enabled with conF-oPr-di7.E.)
StoP
di8 Discrete Input 8
It provides enumerated selections,
oFF and on, that can be used to
implement general purpose logic
states.
oFF - 0
on - 1
(It is enabled with conF-oPr-di8.E.)
oFF
StEP Setpoint Programmer StEP
It indicates the step being
executed by the programmer . It
can also be used to force the
setpoint programmer to a new
step. The setpoint programmer step
sequence execution is from 0 to 12;
13 indicates the program is done.
(It is enabled with conF-oPr-StP.E.)
0
Ai7 Analog Input 7 Register
It provides operator access to
analog input register 7. (See Table
5-2.)
(It is enabled with conF-oPr-Ai.E.)
0.0
Ai8 Analog Input 8 Register
It provides operator access to
analog input register 8. (See Table
5-2.)
(It is enabled with conF-oPr-Ai.E.)
0.0
PL1 Process Limit 1
Specifies the process or deviation
value which triggers the alarm
associated with PA1 as determined
by conF-cn.1(cn.2)-AiX. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-ALM.E.)
100.0
PL2 Process Limit 2
Specifies the process or deviation
value which triggers the alarm
associated with PA2 as determined
by conF-cn.1(cn.2)-AiX. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-ALM.E.)
0.0
Section 3. Display Panel 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
3-9
Table 3-3. oPEr Menu Selections
Prompt Description Dft
Adb Alarm Deadband
Specifies the hystersis (gap)
between alarm trigger and reset.
This value is used to eliminate
repetitive alarm triggering when
the process is fluctuating about a
process limit. This value should be
set slightly larger then the peak-to-
peak fluctuations (noise) which are
normally present in the process
variable signal. (It is enabled with
conF-oPr-ALM.E.)
2.000
Pb Proportional Band (see Section 8.2)
Specifies the percent of process
deviation from setpoint over the
control range (conF-cn.1[cn.2]-ir)
required to generate a full scale
output signal. For a detailed
discussion on control and tuning,
see Section 9. Values should be
limited between 2 to 1000%. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-Pid.E.)
100.0
tr Reset Time (see Section 8.3)
Specifies the time in minutes
required for additional corrective
response (integral action). For a
detailed discussion on control and
tuning, see Section 9. Values
should be limited between 0.02
and 200 minutes /repeat. A value
of 0.0 turns integral action off.
(It is enabled with conF-oPr-Pid.E.)
0.0
td Derivative Time (see Section 8.4)
Specifies the time in minutes that
control response is advanced over
proportional only action. For a
detailed discussion on control and
tuning, see Section 9. Values
should be limited between 0.01 to 8
minutes. A value of 0.0 turns
derivative action off. (It is enabled
with conF-oPr-Pid.E.)
0.0
Mr Manual reset
This value determines the position
of the output element (e.g., valve)
when the controller is in automatic
mode and the error is zero. It is only
in effect when tr is zero. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-Pid.E.)
50.0
oh Output High Limit
Specifies in percent the maximum
allowable control output during
automatic operation. This limit also
affects outputs during manual
operations when conF-cn.1(cn.2)-
hML is turned on. (It is enabled with
conF-oPr-hLc.E.)
0.0
Table 3-3. oPEr Menu Selections
Prompt Description Dft
oL Output Low Limit
Specifies in percent the minimum
allowable control output during
automatic operation. This limit also
affects outputs during manual
operations when conF-cn.1(cn.2)-
hML is turned on. (It is enabled with
conF-oPr-hLc.E.)
0.0
cZ Control Zone
Specifies in engineering units an
area around the setpoint where
the process variable is considered
to be at setpoint (no error). When
the process variable is within this
area, the control output is held
steady at the integrator value as
determined by tr and Mr. Control
Zone is used to reduce valve wear
where process dynamics cause
output oscillations (hunting) when
the process is near its setpoint. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-hLc.E.)
cZ cZ
0.0
EZ? Execute Easy-Tune
Causes Easy-Tune to start
execution. During execution, the
Easy-Tune LED flashes and tunE
appears in the green dro. Upon
successful completion, the Easy-
Tune LED stops flashing and the
green dro no longer displays the
tunE mnemonic. If an error or
warning condition occurs during
execution, the Easy-Tune LED
changes to a steady-state-on
condition and a mnemonic is
displayed in the green dro that
identifies the error or warning.
Pressing the mode/select push
button clears the display. After
taking the appropriate corrective
action(s), Easy-Tune can be
restarted by selecting YeS at the
run? prompt in the EZ menu. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-EZ.E.)
no
EPb Easy-Tune Proportional Band
Resultant %PB value calculated by
Easy-Tune. (It is enabled with
conF-oPr-EZ.E.)
0.0
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 3. Display Panel
3-10
Table 3-3. oPEr Menu Selections
Prompt Description Dft
Etr Easy-Tune Reset Time
Resultant reset time value
calculated by Easy-Tune. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-EZ.E.)
0.0
Etd Easy-Tune Derivative Time
Resultant derivative time value
calculated by Easy-Tune. (It is
enabled with conF-oPr-EZ.E.)
0.0
Table 3-4. Operator Enable (oPr) Prompts
(conF Menu oPr Module)
Prompt Description (see Datalink prompts) Dft
di7.E Discrete Input 7 Enable
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, di7 appears in
the oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, di7 does not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
di8.E Discrete Input 8 Enable
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, di8 appears in
the oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, di8 does not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
StP.E StEP
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, StEP appears
in the oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, StEP does not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
Ai.E Analog Inputs Enable
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, the Ai7 and
Ai8 prompts appear in the
oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, the Ai7 and
Ai8 prompts do not appear in
the oPEr menu.
on
ALM.E Alarm Indicators Enable
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, the PL1, PL2
and Adb prompts appear in
the oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, the PL1, PL2
and Adb prompts do not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
Pid.E Pid (Pb, tr, and td Enables)
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, the Pb, tr, td,
and Mr prompts appear in the
oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, the Pb, tr, td,
and Mr prompts do not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
Table 3-4. Operator Enable (oPr) Prompts
(conF Menu oPr Module)
Prompt Description (see Datalink prompts) Dft
hLc.E oh, oL, and cZ Enables
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, the oh, oL,
and cZ prompts appear in the
oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, the oh, ol,
and cZ prompts do not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
EZ.E EZ?, EPb, Etr, and Etd Enables
Selections are as follows:
on: When selected, the EZ?, EPb,
Etr, and Etd prompts appear in
the oPEr menu.
oFF: When selected, the EZ?, EPb,
Etr, and Etd prompts do not
appear in the oPEr menu.
on
3.9 Display Alphanumerics
Figure 3-12 illustrates all of the alphanumeric char-
acters that can appear in the display prompts.
Figure 3-12. Display Alphanumerics
3.10 Engineer Mode Summary
To facilitate configuration of the controller parame-
ters and path connections, all of the engineer mode
prompt paths are illustrated in Figure 3-13.
Section 3. Display Panel 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
3-11
Figure 3-13. Engineer Mode Prompt Path Summary
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

3
.


D
i
s
p
l
a
y

P
a
n
e
l
3
-
1
2
4.1 Simplified Block Diagram
As shown in Figure 4-1 below, the internal opera-
tions of the 53SL6000 Controller can be classified
into nine major functional areas. An overview of
these functional areas is provided in this section;
additional information is provided in Sections 5
through 7.
NOTE: Although external analog connections to
the controller are two standard inputs, two optional
inputs, and one output, there are in fact eight
analog input registers (AI1-8) and three analog
output (AO1-3) registers available in the controller
database. The discrete digital external
connections include two standard inputs, two
optional inputs, two standard outputs, and two
optional outputs. There are, however, eight
discrete input database registers (DI1- DO8) and
eight discrete output database registers (DO1-
DO8). Registers not assigned to standard or
optional external I/O functions can be loaded with
constant values to simulate known process events
or hold process values for access through datalink
communications or for display.
1. Analog Inputs 1-4 (AI1-4) - accept the 0/4- 20
mA input signals. Analog inputs 3 and 4 re-
quire the universal analog input module. The
signal values are stored in the analog regis-
ters. There are eight analog input registers,
AI1-AI8. Analog input registers AI5-AI8 do not
accept external signals, but can be loaded with
constant values.
2. Discrete Inputs 1-4 (DI1-4) - accept voltages
0-1 V or 4-24 V, which are converted to logic
levels 1 and 0 respectively. Digital inputs 3
and 4 require the 2DI/2DO module. There are
eight digital input registers, DI1-DI8. Digital
input registers DI5-DI8 do not accept external
signals, but can be loaded with logic level val-
ues 0 or 1.
3. Characterizer - provides four operating modes,
three of which are used to modify input signal
values before being passed on to the analog
math function block or control scheme block;
the other operating mode generates a ramp
and hold output value. The four operating
modes are as follows:
Five third order polynomial segments
Twelve segment linearizer
Setpoint programmer (ramp and hold)
Digital-to-Analog converter
4. Math Function Block - provides nine different
equations for analog input signal augmenta-
tion. The equations are as follows:
Algebraic
Summation
Polynomial
Power
Logarithmic
Limiter
Selector
Linear Gas Flow Compensation
Square Root Gas Flow Compensation


4.0 Functional Overview
Figure 4-1. Simplified Controller Block Diagram
Section 4. Functional Overview 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
4-1
5. Discrete Input Logic Blocks - two input logic
blocks permit discrete input signals to be event
gated with internal controller signals according
to any one of eight specified logic functions.
The eight logic functions are as follows:
A OR B
A AND B
A XOR B
A OR NOT B
A AND NOT B
NOT A OR B
NOT A AND B
NOT A XOR B
6. Control Scheme Block - five selectable control
scheme applications that calculate and pro-
duce the necessary control output signal for
the process. The five control schemes are as
follows:
SnGL - Single Loop
cASc - Single Station Cascade
L.LiM - Low Limiter (High Override)
h.LiM - High Limiter (Low Override)
in.Ld - Indicator/Loader
7. Discrete Output Logic Blocks - two output logic
blocks that permit internal controller signals to
be event gated according to any one of eight
specified logic functions (see item 5, Discrete
Input Logic Blocks for functions).
8. Analog Output - there are three analog output
registers, AO1-AO3. Analog output 1 (AO1) is
associated with the standard 0-100 output
value that produces a 0/4-20 mA signal to drive
the final control element or is applied as input
to another controller. Analog output registers
AO2 and AO3 do not provide external signals,
but serve as a loop-back to the math function
block and control scheme block (the loop-back
path is not shown in the illustration).
9. Discrete Outputs 1-4 (DO1-4) - there are eight
digital output registers, DO1-DO8. DO1 and
DO2 provide outputs that may be used to acti-
vate pumps, alarms, etc. Discrete outputs 3
and 4 require the 2DI/2DO module, which pro-
vides relay outputs capable of higher current
loads than DO1 and DO2. DO3 and DO4 are
generally sufficient as the two driver outputs
for time proportional or three step output driv-
ers, which are digital outputs used instead of
the continuous 0/4-20 mA signal. Digital out-
put registers DO5-DO8 have no associated
hardware, but DO7 and DO8 serve as loop-
back registers to the math function block or
input logic blocks (the loop-back path is not
shown in the illustration).
4.2 Detailed Block Diagram
A more detailed functional block diagram of the
controller is illustrated in Figure 4-2. The illustra-
tion depicts processing as divided into analog con-
trol (upper half) and discrete digital control (lower
half). The nine major functional areas are pre-
sented with an emphasis on the available input
path selections. Additional information for each of
the nine functional areas is provided in Sections 5
through 7.
1. Analog Inputs 1-8 (AI1-8) - the two standard
(AI1 and AI2) and two optional inputs (AI3 and
AI4) are identified. The push buttons next to
AI7 and AI8 represent operator access to
these registers via the oPEr menu. Access to
these registers must be enabled with the conF-
oPr-Ai.E parameter; otherwise, they will not
appear in the oPEr prompt list.
2. Discrete Inputs 1-8 (DI1-8) - the two standard
(DI1 and DI2) and two optional inputs (DI3 and
DI4) are identified. Each DI register has two
outputs; one of the outputs is inverted and is
indicated with a slash (/) across the connection
T-bar. The push buttons next to DI7 and DI8
represent operator access to these registers
via the oPEr menu. Access to these registers
must be enabled from the conF-oPr-di7.E and
conF-oPr-di8.E parameters; otherwise, they
will not appear in the oPEr prompt list.
3. Characterizer - is depicted as a five pin plug-
able element, which can be inserted into one of
the track locations of the math function block or
control scheme block. It intercepts the signal
value before the math function block or control
scheme and augments that value as deter-
mined by the selected operating mode (except
for the programmer mode, which generates an
independent signal based on time and config-
ured data). The characterizer output is applied
to the math function block or control scheme
block. The intercept selections Fnc.A through
cS.F are from the ProG-cS-chrA list. As shown
in the illustration, the chr.A Fnc.A - Fnc.d se-
lections are path connections to the math func-
tion block inputs A-D and the cS.A - cS.F
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 4. Functional Overview
4-2 FUNC
selections are path connections to the control
scheme block inputs A - F.
The digital signal selections ([1] - /do8) are
available to characterizer inputs chr.b and
chr.c. These inputs are used by the charac-
terizer for the digital-to-analog (dtoA) and pro-
grammer (PrGM) modes.
The chr digital output is an indicator available
to all of the elements that follow the charac-
terizer in the digital path.
4. Math Function Block - has four analog inputs
(A-D) and two digital inputs (E and F). Each of
the four analog i nput parameters (Fnc.A -
Fnc.d) has the same available connection se-
lections for inputs. If Ao2 or Ao3 is selected
from the list, then the analog output register
contents are fed back as the input into the
math function block.
The digital input selections work in a manner
similar to the analog input selections: the two
digital input parameters (Fnc.E and Fnc.F)
have the same prompt list selections ([1] -
/do8). Discrete outputs do7 and do8 allow for
the looped-back digital inputs to the math func-
tion block.
The math function block analog output (Fnc) is
available for control scheme inputs (cS.A -
cS.F). The digital output (Fnc) is available for
the control scheme block inputs (cS.h - cS.L)
and the l ogic bl ock i nputs (LG1.A, LG1.b,
LG2.A, and LG2.b).
5. Discrete Input Logic Blocks (LG1 and LG2) -
parameter inputs to both logic blocks (LG1.A,
LG1.b, LG2.A, and LG2.b) have the same pa-
rameter prompt list selections ([1] - chr). The
outputs of both logic blocks can be accessed
by the control scheme block input parameters
(cS.h - cS.L), by the LG3.A, LG3.b, LG4.A,
and LG4.b parameters of logic blocks LG3 and
LG4, and by the do1.i - do8.i parameters of the
discrete output registers DO1 - DO8.
6. Control Scheme Block - the analog cS.A - cS.F
input parameters each have the same prompt
list (0.0 - Fnc) and the cS.h - cS.L digital input
parameters each have the same prompt list
([1] - LG2). The Ao3 register contents can be
loop-back selected by a control scheme block
analog input.
The control scheme block analog outputs are
as follows:

out - the calculated PID algorithm output or
value generated from the output push but-
tons.
PV - the process variable received on an
analog input (usually cS.A).
SP - the remote or local setpoint value.
dV - the deviation error as determined
from
the difference between the setpoint and
process variabl e, scal ed by parameter
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-ir and biased by 50.
The digital outputs are as follows:
Vup - time proportional or positive three
step signal.
Vdn - negative three step signal.
PA1 - loop 1 process alarm 1.
PA2 - loop 1 process alarm 2.
SWA - is active when auto is selected with
the auto/manual push button.
Aut - indicates loop 1 is operating in
auto mode (use PID output).
SWr - is active when remote is selected
with the remote/local push button.
rMt - indicates loop 1 remote setpoint is
active.
oVtS - indicates loop 1 output tracking is
active (has priority over Aut).
SPtS - indicates loop 1 setpoint tracking is
active (has priority over rMt).
Aut.2 - indicates loop 2 is operating in auto
mode (use PID output).
PA1.2 - loop 2 process alarm 1.
PA2.2 - loop 2 process alarm 2.
It is the selected control scheme mode that
determines the operator display presentation
assignments and push button assignments.
This is denoted with all seven push buttons
shown in the control schemes illustration (four
in the center and three at the bottom of the
illustration).

There are also eleven push buttons next to the
control schemes illustration that represent op-
erator access to commonly used control mod-
ule parameters (loop 1 cn.1 parameters and
loop 2 cn.2 parameters). These parameters
are accessed via the oPEr menu. However,
they must first be enabled from the conF-oPr
Section 4. Functional Overview 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
4-3
module; otherwise, they will not appear in the
oPEr prompt list.
7. Discrete output logic blocks (Logic 3 and 4) -
par amet er i nput s t o bot h l ogi c modul es
(LG3.A, LG3.b, LG3.A, and LG3.b) have the
same parameter prompt list selections ([1] -
LG2). The outputs of both logic modules can
be accessed by the do1.i - do8.i parameters of
the discrete output registers 1 - 8 (DO1 - DO8).
8. Analog Outputs (AO1-3) - the one analog out-
put associated with the standard hardware is
shown at Ao1. The input prompt list (nc - dV)
is identical for the Ao1.i - Ao3.i parameters of
the analog output registers 1 - 3 (AO1 - AO3).
Values in analog output registers AO2 and
AO3 can be looped-back to the math function
block and/or control scheme block.
Notice, that the input prompt list includes Ai1 -
Ai8 path connections for analog input re-trans-
mission.
9. Discrete Outputs (DO0-8) - digital outputs as-
sociated with the standard and optional hard-
ware are shown as DO1, DO2, DO3, and DO4,
respectively. The input prompt list (nc - LG4)
is identical for the do1.i - do8.i parameters of
the digital output registers (DO1 - DO8). Val-
ues in discrete output registers DO7 and DO8
can be looped-back into the characterizer and
math function block digital inputs. Only the
DO8 val ue can be l ooped-back i nto l ogi c
blocks 1 and 2 (LG1 and LG2).
Notice, that the input prompt list (nc - LG4)
does not include any discrete input path con-
nections; therefore, to re-transmit a discrete
input logic condition, it must first pass through
one of the input logic modules (LG1 or LG2)
which is connected to a discrete output 1-4.
For example, to connect DI1 to LG1 and LG1 to
DO1:
LG1.M = A OR B
LG1.A = di1 (connects DI1 to LG1 input)
LG1.b = 0 (so any input on LG1.A is
passed through unaltered)
do1.i = LG1 (connects DO1 to LG1)
NOTE: Many different process control strategies
can be implemented through the interconnecting
path variations, the five control schemes, and the
large array of configuration prompt selections that
are available in the 53SL6000 controller.
However, to expedite configuration, the eight
control strategies mentioned in Section 1 can each
be invoked very quickly by using the factory
parameter default values and one of the
ProG-cS-SchM parameter selections (for example,
the factory default values and the cASc prompt
from the SchM menu selects Single Station
Cascade Control operation with dual PID control).
These eight control strategies are covered in
Section 8.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 4. Functional Overview
4-4 FUNC
Figure 4-2. Detailed Functional Controller Block Diagram
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

4
.


F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
a
l

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
4
-
5
5.1 I/O Overview
This section provides functional descriptions and
applicable parameter definitions for all of the con-
troller inputs and outputs to include the following:
Analog Inputs
Universal Analog Input Module
Analog Output
Discrete Inputs
Discrete Outputs (and 2DI/2DO Module)
RS-232 and RS-485 Modules
5.2 Analog Inputs
Standard 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA analog
input signals are received by the con-
troller through analog input modules
1 and 2 (Ai.1, Ai.2). The input current
range is selectable as are other pa-
rameters that can be used to apply
conditioning to the signal. The meas-
ured input value is in engineering
units and is stored in the analog reg-
ister after all signal conditioning de-
f i n e d b y t h e a n a l o g mo d u l e
parameters is applied.
The signal conditioning parameters for analog input
modules Ai.1 and Ai.2 are defined in Table 5-1.
The parameter set is identical for each of the two
analog input modules. Table 5-2 lists the analog
input registers; the register actually stores the ana-
log value.
Table 5-1. Analog Input Selections
(conF Menu Ai.1, Ai.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
SPAn
ZEro
Engineering Span, Engineering Zero
These values set the engineering unit
representation of the input signal
over the input range.
Ai SPAn
j
,
(
input%
100
\
(
,
+ ZEro
100.0
0.0
Table 5-1. Analog Input Selections
(conF Menu Ai.1, Ai.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
SQrt Square Root Signal
Speciifies whether the analog input
signal requires square root
characterization (as would be the
case for a differential pressure
transducer across an orifice plate),
or linear interpretation. Selections:
Lin: Linear interpretation.
SQrt: Square root characterization.
(For SQrt selection, the value
of Ai is forced to 0.0 at low in-
put signal levels [<6.25%] to pre-
vent large signal oscillations.)
Lin
bASE Base Current
Specifies the signal range
corresponding to a 0 - 100% input.
Selections:
4-20 mA - 4 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%
0-20 mA - 0 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%.
4-20
dFLt Digital Filter
Specifies the time constant in
seconds for a first order filter through
which the input is processed. The
filter dampens the higher frequency
signal components usually
associated with signal noise. The
larger the selected value, the lower
the frequency affected and the
greater the dampening to the
higher frequencies. Selections:
nonE 0.7 12.7 205
0.05 1.5 25.5 410
0.1 3.1 51.1 819
0.3 6.3 102 1638
0.3
Table 5-2. Analog Input Registers
(ProG Menu Ai Module)
Prompt Description Dft
Ai1 -
Ai8
Analog Input Registers 1 - 8
Registers Ai1and Ai2 are capable of
receiving hardware inputs from
modules Ai.1 and Ai.2. All signal
shaping (e.g., ZEro, SPAn, SQrt,
bASE, dFLt etc.) is performed by the
hardware modules before the value
is entered into the register. Registers
Ai3 - Ai4 can also receive hardware
inputs from an installed universal
analog input module. Constant
values can be entered into registers
Ai1 - Ai8 if the span and zero are
both set to 0 to prevent overwriting
register contents.
0.0
5.0 Inputs/Outputs (I/O)
Section 5. Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
5-1
5.3 Universal Analog Input Module
The universal analog input module can process
one or two inputs, as determined by the type of
option installed. A single channel input module
processes one analog input (Ai3) and has one con-
nector. A dual channel input module processes
two analog inputs (Ai3 and Ai4) and has two con-
nectors. A module can not be field upgraded from
single to dual input.
NOTE: For proper thermocouple operation in a
dual channel universal input module, both
removable connector plugs must be installed in
the module.
This option can process high-level, low-level, ther-
mocouple, resistive thermal device (RTD), fre-
quency, and pulse input types. The dual channel
version can also accept any mix of these input
types at both input connectors. Each input is proc-
essed independently, as 160 db isolation is pro-
vided . Input signal characterization and shaping
are also performed, such as data linearization, cold
junction compensation (CJC), first order digital fil-
tering, and engineering unit conversion.
The module plugs into the rear of the controller at
the 10 pin option slot A connector. It is secured to
the controller case with two screws. (See Figure
2-7.)
An installed universal analog input module loads its
status identification code in the conF-SYS-oPtA pa-
rameter, as described in Table 5-13 at the end of
this book section.
5.3.1 Universal Analog Input Module
Parameter Entries
Parameter entries for the module are listed in Ta-
bles 5-3 through 5-8. Configuring the module for
any of the input types (e.g., Type J thermocouple)
requires accessing information from only two of the
tables. Table 5-3 is referenced first to correlate the
prompt assigned to the input type, followed by one
of the remaining five tables for the specific parame-
ters associated with that input type. The prompts
that do appear when a universal analog input mod-
ule is selected in the conF menu of engineer mode
represent the last type input that was specified.
Selecting the type from Table 5-3 automatically
causes the appropriate parameter suite to replace
the previous one when the scroll forward/backward
push buttons are pressed. (See Section 3 for dis-
play panel procedures.)
Table 5-3. Input Type Prompts
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
Prompt Description See
Table
oFF oFF
This selection causes Ani value
updating to stop.
5-8
1-5V 1 to 5 V 5-4
0-5V 0 to 5 V
0-80 0 80 mV
J.tc TC_J (-200 to +1200C, -325 to
+2190F)
5-5
K.tc TC_K (-200 to +1370C, -320 to
+2490F)
t.tc TC_T (-270 to +400C, -450 to
+750F)
E.tc TC_E (-270 to +1000C, -450 to
+1830F)
r.tc TC_R (0 to +1765C, 32 to +3200F)
S.tc TC_S (0 to +1765C, 32 to +3200F)
b.tc TC_B (100 to +1820C, 215 to
+3300F)
n.tc TC_N (-200 to +1300C, -320 to
+2370F)
c.tc TC_C (0 to +2320C, 32 to +4200F)
L.tc TC_L (-200 to +900C, -320 to
+1650F)
u.tc TC_U (-200 to +600C, -325 to
+1110F)
F.tc TC_F (0 to +1400C, 32 to +2550F)
G.tc TC_G (0 to +2320C, 32 to +4200F)
d.tc TC_D (0 to +2320C, 32 to +4200F)
/E.tc TC_CHE (-50 to +800C, -50 to
+1470F)
/S.tc TC_CHS (0 to +1600C, 32 to
+2900F)
PL.tc TC_PLII (-100 to +1395C, -140 to
+2540F)
Pt.85 RTD385, 100 ohm platinum (-200 to
+850C, -320 to +1560F)
5-6
Pt.91 RTD3911, 100 ohm platinum (-200
to +850C, -320 to +1560F)
Pt.92 RTD3926, 100 ohm platinum (-200
to +870C, -320 to +1590F)
10.c RTD4274, 10 ohm coppper (-200 to
+200C, -320 to +500F)
53.c RTD427, 53 ohm copper (-50 to
+150C, -55 to +300F)
100.c RTD427, 100 ohm copper (-100 to
+260C, -150 to +500F)
100.n RTD618, 100 ohm nickel (-60 to
+180C, -80 to +350F)
120.n RTD672, 120 ohm nickel (-80 to
+273C, -110 to +520F)
FrQ1 Frequency Input 8-100 kHz 5-7
FrQ2 Frequency Input 2.5-100 kHz
FrQ3 Frequency Input 0.5-30 kHz
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 5. Inputs/Outputs (I/O)
5-2
Table 5-3. Input Type Prompts
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
Prompt Description See
Table
dtot Delta Pulse Totalizer (pulse input,
incremental sum) 0-100 kHz
5-7
Table 5-4. Volt/Millivolt Input Types
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
tYPE Make prompt selection from Table
5-3. Applicable types are:
0-5V, 1-5V, 0-80.
1-5V
SPAn
ZEro
Engineering Span, Engineering Zero
These values set the engineering
unit representation of the input
signal over the input range.
Ai SPAn
j
,
(
input%
100
\
(
,
+ ZEro
100.0
0.0
dFLt Digital Filter
Specifies the time constant in
seconds for a first order filter
through which the input is
processed. The filter dampens the
higher frequency signal
components usually associated with
noise. Selections:
nonE 4.2 75.0 1200
0.3 9.0 150.0 2400
0.6 18.6 300.0
1.8 37.2 600
nonE
SQrt Square Root Signal
Speciifies whether the analog input
signal requires square root
characterization (as would be the
case for a differential pressure
transducer across an orifice plate),
or linear interpretation. Selections:
Lin: Linear interpretation.
SQrt: Square root characterization.
(For SQrt selection, the value
of Ai is forced to 0.0 at low
input signal levels [<6.25%] to
prevent large signal
oscillations.)
Lin
Table 5-5. Thermocouple Types
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
tYPE Make prompt selection from Table
5-3. Applicable types are:
J.tc S.tc V.tc \S.tc
K.tc b.tc F.tc PL.tc
t.tc n.tc G.tc
E.tc c.tc d.tc
r.tc L.tc \E.tc
1-5V
dFLt Digital Filter
Specifies the time constant in
seconds for a first order filter
through which the input is
processed. The filter dampens the
higher frequency signal
components usually associated with
noise. Selections:
nonE 4.2 75.0 1200
0.3 9.0 150.0 2400
0.6 18.6 300.0
1.8 37.2 600
nonE
dEG Temperature Scale
Input selections are as follows:
c: Celsius scale.
F: Fahrenheit scale.
c
Table 5-6. RTD Types
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
tYPE Make prompt selection from Table
5-3. Applicable types are:
Pt.85 53.c
PT.91 100.c
Pt.92 100.n
10.c 120.n
1-5V
dFLt Digital Filter
Specifies the time constant in
seconds for a first order filter
through which the input is
processed. The filter dampens the
higher frequency signal
components usually associated with
noise. Selections:
nonE 4.2 75.0 1200
0.3 9.0 150.0 2400
0.6 18.6 300.0
1.8 37.2 600
nonE
dEG Temperature Scale
Input selections are as follows:
c: Celsius scale.
F: Fahrenheit scale.
c
rtd RTD Termination
Input selections are as follows:
3.trM: 3 wire.
4.trM: 4 wire.
3.trM
Section 5. Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
5-3
Table 5-7. Frequency/Pulse Input Types
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
tYPE Make prompt selection from Table
5-3. Applicable types are:
FrQ1, FrQ2, FrQ3, dtot.
1-5V
SPAn
ZEro
Engineering Span, Engineering Zero
These values set the engineering
unit representation of the input
signal over the input range.
Ai SPAn ( input ) + ZEro
100.0
0.0
dFLt Digital Filter
Specifies the time constant in
seconds for a first order filter
through which the input is
processed. The filter dampens the
higher frequency signal
components usually associated with
noise. Selections:
nonE 4.2 75.0 1200
0.3 9.0 150.0 2400
0.6 18.6 300.0
1.8 37.2 600
nonE
Table 5-8. Calibration Constants
(conF Menu Ai.3, Ai.4 Modules)
If any of these values are accidentally overwritten,
reference the factory calibration sheet provided
with the controller and enter the values again.
Prompt Description Dft
tYPE The prompt selection is cAL. 1-5V
biAS
GAin
Voltage Calibration Constants
These two parameters are the zero
offset and span constant for the volt
input range.
b.MV
G.MV
Millivot Calibration Constants
These two parameters are the zero
offset and span constant for the
miilivolt input range.
b.cJc Cold Junction Compensation
Constant
This parameter accounts for the
differences between the actual
module pin temperature and the
temperature measured by the CJC
sensor from within the module.
G.rtd RTD Hardware Compensator
This parameter accounts for the
differences in the modules
hardware characteristics between
the 3 and 4 wire RTDs.
5.4 Analog Output 1 (AO1)
A standard 0-20 mA or 4-20
mA analog signal is trans-
mi t t e d b y t he c o nt r ol l e r
t hr ough anal og out put 1
(AO1). It is defined as percent
output value from 0 to 100.
The single signal conditioning parameter (bASE)
for analog output AO1 is defined in Table 5-9. Ta-
ble 5-10 lists the analog output registers and regis-
ter input connection paths; the register stores the
analog value before it is conditioned (bASE) by
hardware and transmitted. Although there are
three analog output database locations (AO1 -
AO3); only the output from AO1 is transmitted ex-
ternally by the controller. The value contents
stored in analog output registers AO2 and AO3 can
be looped-back if selected by the input connections
of the math function block or control scheme block
(only Ao3 for the control scheme block).
Table 5-9. Analog Output Selections
(conF Menu Ao.1 Module)
Prompt Description Dft
bASE Base Current
Specifies the signal range
corresponding to a 0 - 100% input.
Selections:
4-20 mA - 4 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%
0-20 mA - 0 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%.
4-20
Table 5-10. Analog Output Registers
(ProG Menu Ao Module)
Prompt Description Dft
Ao1 -
Ao3
Analog Output Registers 1 - 3
Ao1 is associated with standard
output hardware Ao.1. Ao2 and
Ao3 provide loop-back to the math
function block; Ao2 also provides
loop-back to the control scheme
block.
0.0
Ao1.i
Ao2.i
Ao3.i
Analog Output Connections
Specifies the input connections for
the standard analog output Ao1
and analog outputs Ao2 and Ao3.
Input selections are as follows:
nc: No connection.
out: Control scheme out value.
Ai1: Analog input 1.
Ai2: Analog input 2.
Ai3: Analog input 3.
Ai4: Analog input 4.
Ai5: Analog Input 5.
Ai6: Analog input 6.
Ai7: Analog input 7.
out
nc
nc
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 5. Inputs/Outputs (I/O)
5-4
Table 5-10. Analog Output Registers
(ProG Menu Ao Module)
Prompt Description Dft
Ao1.i
Ao2.i
Ao3.i
(cont)
Analog Output Connections (cont)
Specifies the input connections for
the standard analog output Ao1
and analog outputs Ao2 and Ao3.
Input selections are as follows:
Ai8: Analog input 8.
Fnc: Function module output.
SP: Control scheme setpoint
output value
PV: Control scheme PV output
value
dV: Control scheme deviation
output value.
out: Control scheme calculated PID
value or manual push button
value.
out
nc
nc
5.5 Discrete Inputs
There are eight discrete input data-
base locations (di1 - di8). Each of
the ei ght di screte i nputs present
both, the standard and inverted val-
ues. Standard inputs at di1 and di2,
and optional inputs di3 and di4 (if the
2DI/2DO option is installed), reflect
logic values based on the voltage
applied as stated in Table 5-11. Dis-
crete inputs which are not associ-
ated with hardware are available for
network or operator input. Discrete
inputs di7 and di8 are accessable to the operator
via enabled oPEr-oPr-di7 and oPEr-oPr-di8 pa-
rameters.
Table 5-11. Discrete Input Selections
(ProG Menu di Module)
Prompt Description Dft
di1,
di8
Discrete Input
State = 1 when signal is a low
voltage (0 to 1 V dc) or closed
contact. A low voltage input
causes the output to be true (1) and
the inverted output (/) to be a 0.
State = 0 when signal is a high
voltage (4 to 24 V dc) or open
contact. A high voltage input
causes the outputs to false (0) and
the inverted output (/) to be a 1.
0
5.6 Discrete Outputs
There are eight discrete output data-
base locations (do1 - do8). Standard
outputs do1 and do2 and optional
outputs do3 and do4 (if the 2DI/2DO
option is installed) produce external
contact actions in response to the
values of the discrete outputs. Dis-
crete outputs not associated with
hardware can be accessed by the
network. The values stored in dis-
crete outputs d07 and do8 can be
looped-back if selected by the path parameters of
the characterizer, math function block, or logic
blocks 1 and 2 (only do8 for the logic blocks).
If the 2DI/2DO option module is installed, it loads
its status identification code in the conF-SYS-oPtb
parameter, as descri bed i n Tabl e 5-13. The
2DI/2DO module plugs into the rear of the control-
ler at the option slot B connector and is secured to
the case with two screws. (See Figure 2-9.)
A typical use of a discrete output is to trigger an
annunciator horn at the onset of a process variable
alarm.
Table 5-12 lists the parameters contained in the
discrete output block.
Table 5-12. Discrete Output Selections
(ProG Menu do Module)
Prompt Description Dft
do1.i
do2.i
do3.i
do4.i
do5.i
do6.i
do7.i
do8.i
Digital Output Connections
Specifies the input connections for
digital outputs do1 - do8. Input
selections are as follows:
nc: No connection.
PA1: cn.1 PL1 active.
PA2: cn.1 PL2 active.
Vup: Time proportional, three step
up.
Vdn: . Three step down.
PA1.2: cn.2 PL1 active.
PA2.2: cn.2 PL2 active.
Fnc: Math function block digital
output.
chr: Characterizer digital output.
LG1: Logic block 1 output.
LG2: Logic block 2 output.
LG3: Logic block 3 output.
LG4: Logic block 4 output.
PA1
PA2
VuP
Vdn
nc
nc
nc
nc
do1-
do8
Discrete Output
It is the state value to be applied to
the output as specified by
inV1- inV8.
0
Section 5. Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
5-5
Table 5-12. Discrete Output Selections
(ProG Menu do Module)
Prompt Description Dft
inV1 -
inV8
Discrete Output Invert
0-on: it indicates a value of zero in
the corresponding do(1-8)
registers and generates an
inactive output (typically an
open contact).
1-on: it indicates a value of one in
the corresponding do(1-8)
registers and generates an
active output (typically a
closed contact).
1-on
5.7 RS-232 and RS-485 Options
Both, the RS-232 and RS-485 communications op-
tions provide network connectivity between a host
device, typically a personal computer, and the con-
troller via the ABB Automation datalink protocol.
Before communications can be established be-
tween the host and the controller, both devices
must be set for the same data rate and protocol
options. Controller communications parameters
for network connectivity are provided in the conF-
SYS module described in Table 5-13. The ABB
Automation datalink protocol is covered in Appen-
dix C.
The RS-232 or RS-485 communications module
plugs into the rear of the controller as shown in
Figure 2-12. It is secured to the backplane with a
single mounting screw.
Table 5-13. System (SYS) Prompts
(conF Menu SYS Module)
Prompt Description (see Datalink prompts) Dft
iA Instrument Addrsss (Datalink)
It is the address assigned to this
controller on the datalink. Valid
addresses are from 0 - 31. No two
controllers can have the same
address on the datalink.
0
bAud Baud Rate (Datalink)
This value is set to match the data
transfer rate of the datalink. Valid
menu selections are:
110 4800
300 9600
600 19.2K
1200 14.4K
2400 28.8K
9600
Table 5-13. System (SYS) Prompts
(conF Menu SYS Module)
Prompt Description (see Datalink prompts) Dft
dLE Datalink Enable (Datalink)
Selections are as follows:
on: Allows controller datalink
communication.
oFF: The controller is not permitted
to communicate over the
datalink.
on
dLP Datalink Parity (Datalink)
Selections are as follows:
on: It indicates parity generation
and checking for even parity
serial byte protocol is enabled.
oFF: It indicates no parity protocol.
on
dLS Datalink Stuffing (Datalink)
Selections are as follows:
on: Selects F&P byte stuffing, which
inserts a NULL (00) byte after
every SOH (7E hex) that is not
the beginning of a message.
This permits user written
communications software to
determine the number of bytes
to expect in a response
message.
oFF: Disables datalink stuffing.
on
Not Communications Parameters
tAG Tag Name
Allows a 10 character tag to be
assigned to the controller. Four
characters maximum can be
displayed at any one time. Using
the engineer mode shift right push
button, the ten character positions
are displayed as follows:
0123 3456 6789
Characters are selected for each
position with the scroll
forward/backward push buttons.
b-FP
oPtA Contains an identification code
provided by the module resident in
slot A at the rear of the controller
case. Codes are as follows:
0: None.
192: 2DI/2DO module.
193: Single universal analog input
module.
194: Dual universal analog input
module.
0
oPtb Contains an identification code
provided by the module resident in
slot B at the rear of the controller
case. Codes are the same as for
oPtA above.
0
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 5. Inputs/Outputs (I/O)
5-6
6.1 Section Overview
Signal modification includes the altering, adjusting,
selecting, or limiting of the analog input signal val-
ues and digital input values. Modification affects
the numeric value and not the electrical charac-
teri si tcs, which are condi ti oned pri or to bei ng
loaded into the analog input registers or digital reg-
ister.
Signal modifications are performed by the charac-
terizer, the math function block, and/or the digital
logic blocks. These elements are shown in the
detailed controller block diagram, illustrated in Fig-
ure 4-2.
6.2 Characterizer
As shown below, the characterizer is depicted as a
five pin plugable module. As such, it can be desig-
nated with its chr.A path selection parameters to
intercept and act upon any one of the four function
generator analog inputs (Fnc.A - Fnc.d), or any
one of the control schemes six analog inputs (cS.A
- cS.F). Two additional digital inputs, selectors
chr.b and chr.c, are used in the characterizer to
activate or trigger actions based on logic values.
Two outputs, one analog and the other digital, pro-
duce values based on the mode of operation se-
lected by the chr.M parameter and the K1-K26
constants.
Table 6-1 is a summary of the connection parame-
ters and the assigned applications for constants
K1-K26 by operating mode. Detailed descriptions
of the characterizer operating modes (third order
polynomial, linear segments mode, setpoint pro-
grammer, and digital-to-analog converter) are pro-
vided in the sections that follow.
Table 6-1. Characterizer Parameters
(ProG Menu chr Module)
Prompt Description Dft
chr.M Characterizer Mode Select
This parameter is used to select how
an analog input is characterized
before it is passed-on to the math
function block for further augmenting
or the control scheme. Characterizer
mode selections are as follows:
oFF: No characterization
performed.
3SEG: Third order polynomial.
LSEG: Linear segments mode.
PGrM: Setpoint programmer.
dtoA: Digital-to-analog conversion.
oFF
chr.A Characterizer Position Select
Specifies the characterizer
connection point at the math
function block or control scheme.
Selections are as follows:
oFF: The characterizer is not used.
Fnc.A: Function module A input.
Fnc.b: Function module B input.
Fnc.c: Function module C input.
Fnc.d: Function module D input.
cS.A: Control scheme A input.
cS.b: Control scheme B input.
cS.c: Control scheme C input.
cS.d: Control scheme D input.
cS.E: Control scheme E input.
cS.F: Control scheme F input.
oFF
chr.b
chr.c
Characterizer b and c Inputs
Specifies connections to the
characterizer b and c inputs.
Selections are as follows:
(1): Logical one input.
(0): Logical zero input.
di1: Discrete input 1 logic value.
/di1: Inverted di1 logic value.
di2: Discrete input 2 logic value.
/di2: Inverted di2 logic value.
di3: Discrete input 3 logic value.
/di3: Inverted di3 logic value.
di4: Discrete input 4 logic value.
/di4: Inverted di4 logic value.
di5: Discrete input 5 logic value.
/di5: Inverted di5 logic value.
di6: Discrete input 6 logic value.
/di6: Inverted di6 logic value.
di7: Discrete input 7 logic value.
/di7: Inverted di7 logic value.
di8: Discrete input 8 logic value.
/di8: Inverted di8 logic value.
do7: Loop-back do7 register value.
/d07: Inverted loop-back do7
register value.
d08: Loop-back do8 register value.
/d08: Inverted loop-back do8
register value.
(1)
(1)
6.0 Signal Value Modification
Section 6. Signal Value Modification 53SL6000 Instruction Bulletin
6-1
Table 6-1. Characterizer Parameters
(ProG Menu chr Module)
Prompt Description Dft
K01 -
K26
Assignments for K01 through K26 for
the three segment (3SEG)
characterizer, linear segment (LSEG)
characterizer, the setpoint
programmer (PGrM), and the digital-
to-analog converter (DtoA) are as
follows
3SEG (executes 5 third order
polynomials):
K01 - K06: Six endpoints that
partition the 5
segments.
K07 - K10: Segment 1 (equation 1)
coefficients.
K11 - K14: Segment 2 (equation 2)
coefficients.
K15 - K18: Segment 3 (equation 3)
coefficients.
K19 - K22: Segment 4 (equation 4)
coefficients.
K23 - K26: Segment 5 (equation 5)
coefficients.
LSEG (13 ordered pairs for 12
segments. Each input value must
be greater than the previous one):
K01 - K13: input coordinates.
K14 - K26: output coordinates.
Ordered segment pairs are K01, K14;
K02, K15; etc.
PGrM:
K01 - K13: Entered time intervals in
whole seconds. Negative
numbers not permitted.
K14 - K26: Target analog output from
characterizer (per step).
DtoA:
K1: B input ramp rate (up).
K2: C input ramp rate (down).
K3: Lower output limit.
K4: Upper output limit.
0.0
6.2.1. 3SEG Mode
The third order polynomial segment characterizer
allows the user to define five adjacent segments.
Each segment has an independent third order poly-
nomial defining the relationship between the A in-
put value and the analog output value. Whenever
the A input value does not fall within any of the five
segments, a logical 1 value is produced at the char-
acterizers digital output; otherwise, a logical 0
value is present at the digital output. The charac-
terizer analog output value is forced to reflect the
value related to the nearest defined segment when-
ever the A input is outside all defined segments.
The five segments are defined by the constants K1
through K6. The values assigned to these con-
stants must be monotonically increasing, going
from K1 to K6, to ensure the segments are adja-
cent. Constants K7 through K26 are divided into
five groups, each with four constants. The group
acts as a set of coefficients for an individual seg-
ments polynomial as given by the equation and
table below:
Output WA
3
+ XA
2
+ YA + Z
Equation Segment W X Y Z
1 K1-K2 K7 K8 K9 K10
2 K2-K3 K11 K12 K13 K14
3 K3-K4 K15 K16 K17 K18
4 K4-K5 K19 K20 K21 K22
5 K5-K6 K23 K24 K25 K26
This characterizer mode provides the capability to
l i neari ze compl ex curves (e.g., thermocoupl e
curves). A linearization example of an E-type ther-
mocouple (operating range -115 to 1000 C) with
the characterizer A input provided in millivolts is as
follows:
Eq. Segment W X Y Z
1 K1: -5.90
K2: 0.0
K7:
0.03947
K8:
0.1575
K9:
17.20
K10:
0.04199
2 K2: 0.0
K3: 13.42
K11:
0.004269
K12:
0.2143
K13:
17.01
K14:
0.02144
3 K3: 7.0
K4: 36.99
K15:
0.0007227
K16:
0.0769
K17:
15.12
K18:
9.264
4 K4: 36.99
K5: 61.02
K19:
0.0002274
K20:
0.02488
K21:
13.26
K22:
32.13
5 K5: 61.02
K6: 76.40
K23:
0.0001247
K24:
0.004976
K25:
11.95
K26:
60.8
Note: many of the values shown in this example
can not be entered directly at the front display
panel due to the limited size of the data entry dis-
play; however, the values given are easily loadable
via the communications network datalink interface
(requires the RS-485 option module).
6.2.2 LSEG Mode
The linear segment characterizer allows the user to
define a relationship between the A input and the
analog output value via a piecewise linear approxi-
mation. The approximation is made up of twelve
adjacent line segments. Each line segment end-
points are defined by two pairs of coordinates, re-
qui ri ng t hi rt een coordi nat e pai rs i n al l . The
coordinate values are stored in characterizer con-
stants K1-K26.
Micro-DCI 53SL6000 Controller
6-2
To ensure the piecewise approximation specifies a
realizable function, the values for the coordinate
inputs, which are stored in characterizer constants
K1 through K13, must be monotonically increasing
(each coordinate value is larger than the preceding
one). There is no such dependency for the output
coordinate values K14 through K26.
Whenever the A input value falls outside all of the
line segments, the characterizers digital output
value is set to a logical 1; otherwise, the digital
output value is always a logical 0. The correspond-
ing output value for an A input outside all of the line
segments can be determined by extending either
the first or the last segment, as required.
An example of coordinate pair constant assign-
ments is illustrated in the following table and figure:
Pair A Input Analog Output
1 K1 = 0.0 K14 = 0.0
2 K2 = 1.0 K15 = 1.0
3 K3 = 2.0 K16 = 4.0
4 K4 = 3.0 K17 = 9.0
5 K5 = 4.0 K18 = 16.0
6 K6 = 5.0 K19 = 25.0
7 K7 = 6.0 K20 = 36.0
8 K8 = 7.0 K21 = 49.0
9 K9 = 8.0 K22 = 64.0
10 K10 = 9.0 K23 = 81.0
11 K11 = 10.0 K24 = 100.0
12 K12 = 11.0 K25 = 121.0
13 K13 = 12.0 K26 = 144.0
6.2.3 PrGM Mode
The characterizer programmer mode allows the
user to define an analog output which depends on
the oPEr-StEP parameter value, the elapsed time
since the current step was entered, the target value
of the StEP, and the target value of the previous
StEP. A typical application for programmer mode
is a setpoint ramp and hold sequence generator.
Thirteen steps can be defined with the charac-
terizer constants K1 through K26. Constants K1
through K13 are configured with the time interval
(0-9999 seconds) required for the target value to
be reached at each st ep and const ant s K14
through K26 are configured with the target analog
output values for each of the steps. During each
step the characterizers analog output ramps from
the target value of the previous step to the target
value of the current step. The current step target
value is reached just as the time interval for that
step expires. One exception is the first step, which
has no previous target, and therefore, outputs the
target value for the entire interval.
The characterizers digital output is a logical zero
value throughout the execution of the step se-
quence. At completion of the last (thirteenth) step,
the digital value is set to a logical one to indicate
completion of the sequence.
The A input is not used in this mode. The two
digital inputs, B and C, are used as follows:
The C input forces both the StEP and interval
timer values to zero whenever it is a logical
zero value.
The B input value specifies whether the inter-
val timer is running (B input = logical 1) or
stopped (B input = logical 0).
The parameter oPEr-StEP allows the operator to
view the current step value and to manually ad-
vance or return to any step in the sequence.
A setpoint programmer ramp and hold sequence,
followed by a summary table and illustration, fol-
lows:
Load K1-K13 with the time duration intervals
and load K14-K26 with the desired setpoint
value at each interval.
Access chr.M of the chr module and set it to
PGrM.
Access chr.A of the chr module and ensure it is
set to cS.b.
Section 6. Signal Value Modification 53SL6000 Instruction Bulletin
6-3
When engineer mode is exited and run is se-
lected, the setpoint will move to the assigned
value for the duration of its corresponding time
interval.
To view the stepped sequence manually, ac-
cess the StEP parameter in the oPEr menu in
engineer mode.
After StEP is selected, the current time interval
number flashes in the red dro.
Use the scroll forward/backward push buttons
to select a new time interval.
After pressing the enter push button, the set-
point will jump to a new value corresponding to
the time interval number entered.
Time Interval Time Duration Setpoint Value
1 1.0 52.0
2 2.0 70.0
3 1.0 70.0
4 3.0 50.0
5 1.0 30.0
6 3.0 100.0
7 2.0 90.0
8 2.0 90.0
9 3.0 65.0
10 2.0 35.0
11 3.0 25.0
12 2.0 25.0
13 4.0 10.0
6.2.4 DtoA Mode
In digital-to-analog mode, the logical values of digi-
tal inputs B and C are converted into a repre-
sentative analog output value. The analog value is
based on the duration of a logical one value on
either input and constants K1 through K4.
When the B input value is a logical one, the charac-
terizers analog output value will ramp up at the
rate set by K1 in units/second. When the C input
value is a logical one, the characterizers analog
output value will ramp down at the rate set by K2 in
units/second. The analog output value is kept be-
tween the lower and upper limits set in K3 and K4
respectively. Whenever the analog output value is
being limited, the digital output will be a logical one;
otherwise, it is a logical zero.
The figure below illustrates the relationship be-
tween the digital inputs and resulting analog out-
put. The logic output limiting indicator is also
shown in the figure.
6.3 Math Function Block
The math function block (shown below) allows the
user to choose one of nine algebraic equations with
the ProG-Fnc-Fnc.M parameter. These equations
are provided to meet a wide range of application
requirements. Depending on the equation se-
lected, up to four analog inputs (A - D), two digital
inputs (E and F), and six constants (K1 - K6) are
used to generate the analog and digital outputs.
The path connection parameters (Fnc.A - Fnc.F)
allow the user to choose inputs from a variety of
analog and digital sources, and align them as re-
quired in the fixed equation positions to obtain the
desired outputs.
Table 6-2 summarizes the ProG-Fnc module pa-
rameter selections for the math function block. The
equations with brief descriptions follow the table.
Micro-DCI 53SL6000 Controller
6-4
Table 6-2. Math Function Block Parameters
(ProG Menu Fnc Module)
Prompt Description Dft
Fnc.M Math Function Block Mode Select
This mode parameter is used to
select the function to be performed
on the inputs of the math function
block. Function selections are as
follows:
oFF: No functions selected.
ALG: Algebraic.
SuMM: Summation.
PoLY Polynomial.
PoWr Exponential.
LoG: Logarithmic.
LiM: Limiting.
SEL: Four Signal Selector.
LFLo: Linear Flow.
SFLo: Square Root Flow.
oFF
Fnc.A
Fnc.b
Fnc.c
Fnc.d
Math Function Block Analog Inputs
A-D
Specifies a connection to the
analog A - D inputs of the math
function block. Selections are as
follows:
1.0: A constant value input of 1.0.
0.0: A constant value input of 0.0.
Ai1: The standard analog input 1
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai1
register.
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Ai2: The standard analog input 2
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai2
register.
Ai3: The optional analog input 3
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai3
register.
Ai4: The optional analog input 4
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai4
register.
Ai5: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ai6: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ai7: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ai8: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ao2: Loop-back Ao2 register value.
Ao3: Loop-back Ao3 register value.
Table 6-2. Math Function Block Parameters
(ProG Menu Fnc Module)
Prompt Description Dft
Fnc.E
Fnc.F
Math Function Block Digital Inputs
E and F
Specifies connections to the digital
inputs E and F of the math function
block. Selections are as follows:
[1]: Logical one input.
[0]: Logical zero input.
di1: Discrete input 1 logic value.
/di1: Inverted di1 logic value.
di2: Discrete input 2 logic value.
/di2: Inverted di2 logic value.
di3: Discrete input 3 logic value.
/di3: Inverted di3 logic value.
di4: Discrete input 4 logic value.
/di4: Inverted di4 logic value.
di5: Discrete input 5 logic value.
/di5: Inverted di5 logic value.
di6: Discrete input 6 logic value.
/di6: Inverted di6 logic value.
di7: Discrete input 7 logic value.
/di7: Inverted di7 logic value.
di8: Discrete input 8 logic value.
/di8: Inverted di8 logic value.
do7: Loop-back do7 register value.
/d07: Inverted loop-back do7
register value.
d08: Loop-back do8 register value.
/d08: Inverted loop-back do8
register value.
[1]
[1]
K01 -
K06
K01 through K06 are the formula
constants of the math function
block. Valid input values for K01
through K06 are -999 to 9999.
0.0
6.3.1 ALG Mode
The basic algebraic functions (additon, subtraction,
multiplication, and division), as well as limited com-
binations of them, are provided by this equation.
The constants K1 through K6 provide a means of
scaling the four analog inputs if required.
X
(A + K1) (B + K2)
C + K3
K4 + K5 D + K6
6.3.2 SuMM Mode
The summer allows up to three inputs to be com-
bined into a single multi-component value which
may be further modified (multiplicative) by the
fourth input. The constants K1 through K6 allow
the individual inputs to be scaled to the proper
relationship for combining.
X (K1 A + K2 B + K3 C + K4) (K5 D + K6)
Section 6. Signal Value Modification 53SL6000 Instruction Bulletin
6-5
6.3.3 PoLY Mode
This is a third order polynomial equation which op-
erates on an algebraic combination of the four ana-
log inputs. The constants K1 through K4 are the
coefficients for the equation. The constants K5
and K6 allow for some limited scaling of the four
analog inputs.
X K4
,
,

(AB + K5)
C + K6
+ D
]
]
]
3
+ K3
,
,

(AB + K5)
C + K6
+ D
]
]
]
2
+ K2
,
,

(AB + K5)
C + K6
+ D
]
]
]
+ K1
6.3.4 PoWr Mode
This mode provides a general purpose exponential
(power) equation with the four analog inputs as-
signed in the exponent, base, multiplier, and bias.
The constants K1 through K6 provide scaling for all
four except the bias term.
X K5C + K6
[
K1A + K2
]
(K3B + K4)
+ D
An important use of the exponential equation is
calculating flow values using weirs and Parshall
flumes as measuring elements. The table below
gives the required assignments for three types of
weirs: rectangular, cipolletti, and triangular based
on the weirs dimensions (Length - feet, height -
inches, and x - degrees). Analog output is in gal-
lons per minute (gpm).
Power Equation Constants by Weir Type
Constant Rectangular Cipolletti Triangular
Fnc.A h h h
Fnc.b 0 0 0
Fnc.c h 0 0
Fnc.d 0 0 0
K1 1 1 1
K2 0 0 0
K3 0 0 0
K4 1.5 1.5 2.47
K5 -0.6 0 0
K6 3L 3.037L see K6
below
K6 for triangular weirs is as follows:
K6 2.42.9
[
tan (
x
2
)
]

0.992
6.3.5 LoG Mode
The logarithm equation produces a base 2 logarith-
mic value of the algebraic function of the four ana-
log inputs. The constants K1 through K5 provide
scaling for the input values. Constant K5 is a mul-
tiplier which can be used to convert the base of the
logarithm. For example:
Log 10 (x) 0.301 Log 2 (x)
Log e (x) 0.6932 Log 2 (x)
X K5 Log
2

,
,

(A + K1) (B + K2)
C + K3
K4 + D
]
]
]
+ K6
6.3.6 LiM Mode
The limiter generates both an analog and a digital
output value. The analog output reflects the scaled
A input as long as it does not exceed the scaled B
input (upper limit) or fall below the scaled C input
(lower limit). If either is exceeded, the digital out-
put will be a logical one value; otherwise, it is a
logical 0 value.
if K1A + K2 K3B K4 then X K3B + K4, Y 1
else if K5C + K6 K1A + K2 then X K5C + K6, Y 1
else X A Y 0
Micro-DCI 53SL6000 Controller
6-6
6.3.7 SEL Mode
The selector allows one of four analog input values
to be passed to the analog output based on the
values of the two digital inputs (E and F). Three of
the analog inputs (B, C, and D) can be scaled by
the constants K1 through K6. The switching dia-
gram below the equation shows how the digital
inputs control the value passed to the analog out-
put.
if E 1 and F 1, then X K5D + K6
if E 1 and F 0, then X K3C + K4
if E 0 and F 1, then X K1B + K2
if E 0 F 0, then X A
6.3.8 Gas Flow Compensation
Equations
Pressure and temperature compensated gas flow
equations for both linear and square root flow ele-
ments are provided to compute the mass flow or
"standard volume" flow of a gas. The equations
handle both perfect and imperfect gases. Three
inputs representing A - flow (differential pressure),
B - absolute pressure, and C - absolute tempera-
ture are converted to a flow output signal based on
a set on parameters K1 through K6.
Imperfect Gases in Operating Zone
K1 Overall meter coefficient
K2 Slope of Y factor line (negative)
K3 Coefficient in density equation
K4 Pressure bias in density equation
K5 Temperature bias in density equation
K6 Density bias in density equation
K3-K6 Inputs for Gas that Behaves as
Perfect Gas in Operating Zone
K3 Molecular weight/Universal Gas
Constant, R
K4 0
K5 460 R or 273 K
K6 0
K2 Input if Acoustic Ratio is Very Low
(Y = 1.0)
K2 0
6.3.8.1 Linear Gas Flow Compensation
(LFLo) Equation
X K1A
[
K3
B K4
C + K5
+ K6
]
A is actual CFM volumetric flow
B is absolute pressure
C is temperature (in R or K)
6.3.8.2 Square Root Gas Flow
Compensation (SFLo) Equation
X K1
[
1 K2
A
B
]
A
[
K3
B K4
C + K5
+ K6
]
A is measured differential pressure
B is absolute pressure
C is temperature (in R or K)
6.4 Logic Blocks 1, 2, 3, and 4
As shown in the figures below, each logic block
1,2,3, and 4 can perform a selected mode of opera-
tion on two input variables A and B to produce an
output at LG(1-4). Inputs A and B, as well as the
output, are all logic values (0/1). The applicable
modes of operation and the selectable inputs for all
four logic blocks are provided in Table 6-3 and the
outputs produced by the various operating modes
are summarized in Table 6-4.
Section 6. Signal Value Modification 53SL6000 Instruction Bulletin
6-7
Table 6-3. Logic Block Parameters
(ProG Menu LG Module)
Prompt Description Dft
LG1.M
LG2.M
LG3.M
LG4.M
Logic Blocks 1 - 4 Mode Select
These mode parameters are used to
select the logical operation to be
performed on the inputs of the logic
blocks. Function selections for each
block are as follows:
oFF: No logical operation
performed.
or: A OR B.
/or: NOT A OR B.
And: A AND B.
/And: NOT A AND B.
Xor: A EXCLUSIVE OR B.
/Xor: NOT A EXCLUSIVE OR B.
or/: A OR NOT B.
And/: A AND NOT B.
oFF
oFF
oFF
oFF
LG1.A
LG1.b
LG2.A
LG2.b
A and B Inputs for Logic Blocks 1
and 2
Specifies the connections for the A
and B inputs of logic blocks 1 and 2.
Input selections are as follows:
[1]: Logical one input.
[0]: Logical zero input.
di1: Discrete input 1 logic value.
/di1: Inverted di1 logic value.
di2: Discrete input 2 logic value.
/di2: Inverted di2 logic value.
di3: Discrete input 3 logic value.
/di3: Inverted di3 logic value.
di4: Discrete input 4 logic value.
/di4: Inverted di4 logic value.
di5: Discrete input 5 logic value.
/di5: Inverted di5 logic value.
di6: Discrete input 6 logic value.
/di6: Inverted di6 logic value.
di7: Discrete input 7 logic value.
/di7: Inverted di7 logic value.
di8: Discrete input 8 logic value.
/di8: Inverted di8 logic value.
do7: Loop-back do7 register value.
/d07: Inverted loop-back do7
register value.
d08: Loop-back do8 register value.
/d08: Inverted loop-back do8
register value.
Fnc: Math function block digital
output.
chr: Characterizer output.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Table 6-3. Logic Block Parameters
(ProG Menu LG Module)
Prompt Description Dft
LG3.A
LG3.b
LG4.A
LG4.b
A and B Inputs for Logic Blocks 3
and 4
Specifies the connections for the A
and B inputs of logic blocks 3 and 4.
Input selections are as follows:
[1]: Logical 1 input.
[0]: Logical 0 input.
PA1: cn.1 AL1 active.
PA2: cn.1 AL2 active.
Vup: Floating control valve up.
Vdn: Floating control valve down.
SWA: Auto switch.
SWr: Remote switch.
Aut: Loop 1 is in auto control.
rMt: Remote.
oVtS: Output track status.
SPtS: Setpoint track status.
PA1.2: cn.2 AL1 active.
PA2.2: cn.2 AL2 active.
Aut.2: Loop 2 is in auto control.
Fnc: Math function block digital
output.
chr: Characterizer output.
LG1: Logic block 1 output.
LG2: Logic block 2 output.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Table 6-4. Discrete Logic Block Functions
A OR B (or) A AND NOT B (And/)
A B LG1-4 A B LG1-4
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 1
A AND B (And) NOT A OR B (/or)
A B LG1-4 A B LG1-4
0 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 0
A XOR B (Xor) NOT A AND B (/And)
A B LG1-4 A B LG1-4
0 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 1 0 1
A OR NOT B (or/) NOT A XOR B (/Xor)
A B LG1-4 A B LG1-4
0 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1 0 0
Micro-DCI 53SL6000 Controller
6-8
7.1 Control Scheme Block
The control scheme block, which is the primary
functional element of the controller, provides the
capability to select and implement any one of five
control schemes. Each control scheme is the basic
building block for many control strategies. The five
control schemes are described as follows:
SnGl - For control strategies requiring single
loop standard PID functional capabilities.
cASc - For control strategies requiring tighter
control of processes using dual PID loops in a
cascade configuration.
L.LiM - For control strategies with two interde-
pendent loops where one of the two variables
must not exceed a safe low limit.
h.LiM - For control strategies with two interde-
pendent loops where one of the two variables
must not exceed a safe high limit.
i n. Ld - For appl i cat i ons t hat r equi r e an
auto/manual selector, or a manual loader, or a
two/three variable indicator with process vari-
able re-transmission capabilities
When used in conjunction with the path selections,
confi gurati on parameters, characteri zer bl ock,
math function block, discrete logic blocks 1-4, and
I/O blocks, the five control schemes are able to
address most standard control applications. Each
of the control schemes, with the exception of the
indicator/loader (in.Ld), have a setpoint generator
with deviation calculator, a PID algorithm, and an
auto/manual output selector. The in.Ld control
scheme does not implement the setpoint generator
or the PID algorithm, as its primary functions are
signal display, selection, signal re-transmission,
and manual output control.
Control scheme information presented in this sec-
tion covers the cS.A - cS.L input signal selectors
f or each of t he cont rol schemes, t he control
scheme logic, the three major parts (SP generator,
PID, A/M selector) of a control scheme with SnGL,
cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM exceptions noted, and the
in.LD control scheme.
Also covered are all control scheme related pa-
rameters and input selections.
7.2 Control Scheme Inputs
The five control schemes with their inputs are illus-
trated in Figure 7-1. In the figure, the L.LiM and
h.LiM control schemes are shown in the same illus-
tration, as these two control schemes have the
same inputs. Each control module (cn.1, cn.2) is
also identified in the figure by loop number.
The A-F inputs loaded via the cS.A - cS.F input
selectors for all five of the control schemes are
dedicated to analog signals. These analog signals
can come from the analog inputs or the math func-
tion block and may be modified with the charac-
terizer block. The h-L inputs loaded via the cS.h -
cS.L input selectors are the control signal enables
that cause the control schemes to perform specific
functions (e.g., AE for auto enable, RE for remote
enable, etc.). The control signals are digital logic
values which can come from the discrete inputs,
the math function block, or the logic blocks.
7.3 Control Scheme Control Signals
Table 7-1 describes the operations for the logic
control signals contained in control modules cn.1
and cn.2. These signals are derived from both,
digital input logic values and push button. They
control analog signal switches which in turn affect
the operations and thus the outputs of the control
modules. Also provided, is Figure 7-2, which illus-
trates the interrelationships between digital inputs,
push buttons entries, control scheme switches, and
other control signals. As shown in the figure, the
control signal priorities are oVtS having prece-
dence over Aut, and SPtS having precedence over
rMt. The control signals are depicted in hexagons.
Other analog signal switches are controlled by the
conF-cn.1(cn.2) module parameters, which are de-
picted as circled inputs; and the ProG-cS module
parameters, which are depicted as diamond inputs.
7.0 Control Scheme Block
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-1
Figure 7-1. Input Signal Designators by Control Scheme
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

7
.


C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
c
h
e
m
e

B
l
o
c
k
7
-
2
Table 7-1. Control Signal Descriptions
Signal Description
Aut Auto Status
For SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM control
schemes, Aut selects the PID algorithm
result instead of the output push buttons
to be directed to the control schemes
primary output (out).
In the in.Ld scheme, the B input scaled by
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-K1 and conF-cn.1(cn.2)-
b1 is used in place of the PID algorithm
result as the primary output (out).
For the Aut signal to become active, the
H input must be a logical one value and
the A/M push button activated. When
the Aut signal is active, the automatic
indicator LED lights and the manual
indicator LED is off.
When the H input is not a logical one,
and the A/M push button is activated,
the automatic indicator LED will flash
while the manual indicator LED will
remain lit.
Aut.2 Auto Status (Loop 2)
For cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM control
schemes, Aut.2 selects the loop 2 PID
algorithm result instead of the loop 2
output push buttons to be used as the
loop 2 output which is applied to loop 1.
The Aut.2 signal is available as a digital
output from the control scheme block.
The Aut.2 signal is activated by the loop 2
A/M push button. When Aut.2 is active,
the loop 2 automatic indicator LED and
the manual indicator LED is off.
oVtS Output Track Status
For all control schemes, oVtS selects the D
input value to be directed to the control
schemes primary analog output (out),
thus bypassing the PID and output push
button values.
The output slew rate (oSr), and when
hard manual limiting is selected (hML),
the output high (oh) and output low (oL)
limit parameters are applied.
When the oVtS signal is active, it is
indicated with a flashing manual LED.
The oVtS signal is also available as a
digital output from the control scheme
block. The oVtS signal is simply the
inverse value of the control scheme K
input.
Table 7-1. Control Signal Descriptions
Signal Description
oVtS.2 Output Track Status (Loop 2)
For the cASc control scheme, oVtS.2
forces the loop 2 (primary) output to
match the loop 1 (secondary) setpoint
whenever loop 2 is not controlling the
setpoint of loop 1. This provides for
bumpless transfer from local or setpoint
tracking to remote setpoint (cascade)
operation.
When the oVtS.2 signal is active, it is
indicated with a flashing loop 2 manual
LED.
oVtS.2 does not apply to other control
schemes and is forced to an inactive
value.
rMt Remote Setpoint Status
Remote setpoint status selects the
setpoint from a source other than the
setpoint push buttons. For the SnGL
control scheme, this source is the B input.
For the cASc control scheme, the source
is the output of loop 2. For the L.Lim and
h.LiM control schemes, the source is the
conF-cn.1-bi parameter (conF-cn.1-K1 =
0.0), which can be thought of as a fixed
secondary setpoint.
The rMt signal is available as a digital
output from the control scheme block.
For the rMt signal to become active, the J
input must be a logical one value and
the R/L push button activated (in remote -
R). When the rMt signal is active, the
remote indicator LED lights and the local
indicator LED is off.
When the J input is not a logical one and
the A/M push button is activated, the
remote indicator LED will flash and the
manual indicator will remain lit.
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-3
Table 7-1. Control Signal Descriptions
Signal Description
SPtS Setpoint Track Status
For the SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM
control schemes, SPtS selects the StV
value to be used for the setpoint, thus
bypassing the remote setpoint and
setpoint push button values.
The value of StV follows the A input when
process variable tracking (PVt) is
selected; otherwise, it is a fixed
configurable value.
The setpoint slew rate (SSr) and the
setpoint high and low limit (sh, sL)
paramerters are applied.
When the SPtS signal is active, it is
indicated with a flashing local LED.
The SPtS signal is also available as a
digital output from the control scheme
block. The SPtS signal is simply the inverse
value of the L input when there is no
process variable track.
When process variable tracking is
selected, SPtS is active whenever oVtS is
active or when Aut is not active.
SPtS.2 Septoint Track Status (Loop 2)
For cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM control
schemes when process variable tracking
(PVt.2) is selected for the primary (cASc)
or limiting (L/h.LiM) loop (loop 2), SPtS.2
selects the B input as the setpoint value
for the primary/limiting loop instead of
the loop 2 setpoint push buttons.
SPtS.2 is simply the inverse of Aut.2 with
the L.Lim and h.LiM control schemes.
For the cASc control scheme, SPtS.2 is
active whenever the primary loop is not
controlling the setpoint of the secondary
loop (loop 1), or whenever the primary
loop is not in automatic operating mode.
When the SPtS.2 signal is active, it is
indicated with a flashing loop 2 local LED.
SPtS.2 does not apply to the SnGL or the
in.Ld control schemes or when process
variable tracking (PVt.2) is not active in
loop 2, in which case it is forced to an
inactive value.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-4
Figure 7-2. Control Signal Logic Paths
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

7
.


C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
c
h
e
m
e

B
l
o
c
k
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
7
-
5
7.4 Signal Paths for the SnGL, cASc,
L.LiM, and h.LiM Control
Schemes
Figure 7-3 is a graphical representation of the con-
trol scheme block as it applies to the SnGL, cASc,
L.LiM, and h.LiM control schemes. The hexagons
in the figure are the control signal outputs from
Figure 7-2. They enable analog signal switch
paths that affect operation of the control scheme.
Other analog signal switches are controlled by the
conF-cn.1(cn.2) module parameters, which are de-
picted as circled inputs; and the ProG-cS module
parameters, which are depicted as diamond inputs.
Figure 7-3 contains both, the cn.1 and cn.2 control
loop modules. The upper half of the diagram is for
cn.2 and the lower half is for cn.1. Each half con-
tains three distinct functional areas:
1. Setpoint Generator with Deviation Calculator
(SP-PV) - It controls setpoint selection (local
push buttons, remote setpoint [cn.1 only], or
setpoint tracking) and applies the setpoint
high/low limits and setpoint slew rate. It calcu-
lates the deviation (SP-PV) to determine the
error value that is passed on to the PID after
control zone modification. It generates proc-
ess or deviation alarms, and also drives the
setpoint display bar, setpoint dro, PV display
bar, and PV dro.
2. PID - It uses the deviation and process vari-
able values as determined by direct or reverse
control action to apply the proportional, inte-
gral, and derivative actions; and augments the
result with any additive feed forward (input).
The integral term allows both, internal and ex-
ternal E input feedback paths. Finally, it ap-
plies the output high/low limits to the result.
3. Auto/Manual Output Selector (OUT) - It allows
the control output (out) to be selected from one
of the three sources: PID result, output push
buttons, or output tracking (D input). It also
applies the output high/low limits when indi-
cated by the conF-cn.1(cn.2)-hML parameter
to the final result. Both, an analog (out) and
dual digital (VuP, Vdn) output are provided.
The cn.1 and cn.2 modules are very similar; how-
ever, cn.1 also has the conF-cn.1-SPM (setpoint
mode) path enable parameter. Its purpose is to
select between the ratio (K-SP) and standard (Std)
setpoints.
7.4.1 Setpoint (SP-PV) Paths for the
SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM
Control Schemes
The control scheme setpoint (SP-PV) paths are
depicted in Figures 7-4 through 7-9. These figures
are partials of Figure 7-3. Unless specifically re-
quired by the example (e.g., SPM = K-SP, for the
remote ratio setpoint example in Figure 7-6), the
parameter path settings are arbitrary (e.g., SPM
can be set for standard [Std] or ratio [K-SP] set-
point in the other examples). The control scheme
setpoint path figures are as follows:
Figure 7-4. Common Setpoint Path Logic
Figure 7-5. Local Standard (Std) Setpoint
Path
Figure 7-6. Remote Ratio Setpoint Path
Figure 7-7. STV Setpoint Tracking
Figure 7-8. PVT Setpoint Tracking
Figure 7-9. cASc Control Scheme Setpoint
Path
7.4.2 PID Paths for the SnGL, cASc,
L.LiM, and h.LiM Control
Schemes
The control scheme PID paths are depicted in Fig-
ures 7-10 through 7-12. These figures are partials
of Figure 7-3. Unless specifically required by the
example, the parameter path settings are arbitrary
(e.g., rSW can be set for direct [dir] or reverse
[rEV]). The control scheme PID path figures are
as follows:
Figure 7-10. Pb, td, and tr PID Paths
Figure 7-11. Pb, td, tr, and FF PID Paths
Figure 7-12. Pb, td, tr, and FF PID Paths with
EXrF
7.4.3 OUT Paths for the SnGL, cASc,
L.LiM, and h.LiM Control
Schemes
The control scheme OUT paths are depicted in
Figures 7-13 through 7-16. These figures are par-
tials of Figure 7-3. Unless specifically required by
the example, the parameter path settings are arbi-
trary (e.g., rSV can be set for direct [dir] or reverse
[rEV]). The control scheme OUT path figures are
as follows:
Figure 7-13. Output Tracking Path
Figure 7-14. Auto Output Path
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-6
Figure 7-15. Manual Output Path
Figure 7-16. Auto Digital Output Path
7.5 Signal Paths for the in.Ld
Control Scheme
The indicator/loader (in.Ld) control scheme paths
are depicted in Figures 7-17 through 7-20. The
hexagons in the figures are the control signal out-
puts from Figure 7-2. They enable analog signal
switch paths that affect operation of the control
scheme. Other analog signal switches are con-
trolled by the conF-cn.1 module parameters, which
are depicted as circled inputs; and the ProG-cS
module parameters, which are depicted as dia-
mond inputs. Unless specifically required by the
example, the parameter path settings are arbitrary
(e.g., rSV can be set for direct [dir] or reverse
[rEV]). The in.Ld control scheme path figures are
as follows:
Figure 7-17. in.Ld Control Scheme Alarmed
Variable Input
Figure 7-18. in.Ld Control Scheme Auto
Input with Digital Output
Figure 7-19. in.Ld Control Scheme Output
Tracking
Figure 7-20. in.Ld Control Scheme Manual
Output
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-7
Figure 7-3. SnGL, cASc, L.LiM, and h.LiM Signal Paths
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

7
.


C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
c
h
e
m
e

B
l
o
c
k
7
-
8
Figure 7-4. Common Setpoint Logic Paths
Figure 7-5. Local Standard (Std) Setpoint Path
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-9
Figure 7-6. Remote Ratio Setpoint Path
Figure 7-7. StV Setpoint Tracking
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-10
Figure 7-8. PVt Setpoint Tracking
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-11
Figure 7-9. cASc Control Scheme Setpoint Path
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-12
Figure 7-10. Pb, td, and tr PID Paths
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-13
Figure 7-11. Pb, td, tr, and FF PID Paths
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-14
Figure 7-12. Pb, td, tr, and FF PID Paths with EXrF
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-15
Figure 7-13. Output Tracking Path
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-16
Figure 7-14. Auto Output Path
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-17
Figure 7-15. Manual Output Path
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-18
Figure 7-16. Auto Digital Output Path
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-19
Figure 7-17. in.Ld Control Scheme Alarmed Variable Input
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-20
Figure 7-18. in.Ld Control Scheme Auto Input with Digital Output
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-21
Figure 7-19. in.Ld Control Scheme Output Tracking
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-22
Figure 7-20. in.Ld Control Scheme Manual Operation
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-23
7.6 Control Scheme Parameters
Table 7-2 provides the control scheme ProG-cS
module parameters. These parameters set the ba-
sic operation of the control scheme block and de-
termine the input signal sources. Whenever these
parameters are edited, control operation is turned
off as when any other ProG menu parameter is
edited.
Table 7-2. Control Scheme Parameters
(ProG Menu cS Module)
Prompt Description Dft
SchM Control Scheme
This is a mode switch used to select
the control scheme. Control
scheme selections are as follows:
SnGL: Single loop control.
cASc: Cascade control.
L.LiM: Low limiter (high override)
control.
h.LiM: High limiter (low override)
control.
in.Ld: Indicator/Loader operation.
SnGL
cS.A
cS.b
cS.c
cS.d
cS.E
cS.F
Control Scheme cS.A - cS.F Inputs
Specifies connections to the cS.A -
cS.F inputs of the control scheme.
Input selections are as follows:
0: A constant value input of 0.0.
Ai1: The standard analog input 1
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai1
register.
Ai2: The standard analog input 2
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai2
register.
Ai3: The optional analog input 3
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai3
register.
Ai4: The optional analog input 4
value or a constant value
previously loaded into the Ai4
register.
Ai5: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ai6: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ai7: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
Ai8: A constant value previously
loaded into this register.
A03: Looped-back value from A03
register.
Fnc: The function generator
analog output.
Ai1
Ai2
0.0
Ai7
0.0
0.0
Table 7-2. Control Scheme Parameters
(ProG Menu cS Module)
Prompt Description Dft
PVt Process Variable Tracking
Specifies whether the setpoint
should be forced to match the
current process variable cS.A input
when loop 1 is not in automatic
control. When PVt is set to YES, the
setpoint automatically tracks the
process variable whenever loop 1 is
in manual or forced output
operating mode (output tracking).
Process variable tracking eliminates
process bumps when switching to
automatic from manual or forced
output (output tracking) operation.
no
doFb Digital Output Feedback
When set to YES, it enables the
valve position value from the slide
wire to be displayed in the yellow
dro. This parameter is applicable for
proportional speed floating control
output.
no
EXrF External Reset Feedback
When set to YES, the PID reset value
comes from an external source via
the control scheme cS.E input.
When set to no, the PID reset value
is feedback from the control
scheme output.
no
PVt.2 Process Variable Tracking 2
Specifies whether the setpoint
should be forced to match the
current process variable cS.b input
when loop 2 is not in automatic
control. When PVt.2 is set to YES,
the setpoint automatically tracks
the process variable whenever loop
2 is in manual or forced output
operating mode (output tracking).
Process variable tracking eliminates
process bumps when switching to
automatic from manual or forced
output (output tracking) operation.
no
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-24
Table 7-2. Control Scheme Parameters
(ProG Menu cS Module)
Prompt Description Dft
cS.h
cS.J
cS.K
cS.L
Control scheme cS.h - cS.L Digital
Inputs
Specifies path connections to the
cS.h - cS.L control scheme digital
inputs. Selections are as follows:
(1): Logical one input.
(0): Logical zero input.
di1: Discrete input 1 logic value.
/di1: Inverted di1 logic value.
di2: Discrete input 2 logic value.
/di2: Inverted di2 logic value.
di3: Discrete input 3 logic value.
/di3: Inverted di3 logic value.
di4: Discrete input 4 logic value.
/di4: Inverted di4 logic value.
di5: Discrete input 5 logic value.
/di5: Inverted di5 logic value.
di6: Discrete input 6 logic value.
/di6: Inverted di6 logic value.
di7: Discrete input 7 logic value.
/di7: Inverted di7 logic value.
di8: Discrete input 8 logic value.
/di8: Inverted di8 logic value.
Fnc: Function generator output.
chr: Characterizer output.
LG1: Logic 1 module output.
LG2: Logic 2 module output.
(1)
di2
/di1
(1)
FiX Function Index
This parameter contains a 001 when
the controller is running and a 000
when it is stoppped. Before
configuring the controller, the
database can be defaulted to the
factory settings by entering a 098
into this parameter.
000
7.7 Control Loop Parameters
Table 7-3 lists the conF-cn.1(cn.2) configuration
parameters for both control loop modules. Some
parameters are not applicable to cn.2 and are so
noted.
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
AiX Alarm Index
Selects the type of process alarm
monitoring to be performed in the
control loop. Limit trip points are set
in PL1 and PL2 and alarm conditions
are signaled by PA1 and PA2
respectively. Selections:
h/L: high/low alarms (PA1 active
when PV > PL1;
PA2 active when PV < PL2).
oFF: no alarming performed.
h/- : high alarm only (PA1 active
when PV < PL1.
-/L: low alarm only (PA2 active
when PV < PL2).
h/hh: high/high-high alarms (PA1
active when PV > PL1;
PA2 active when PV > PL2).
L/LL: low/low-low alarms (PA1
active when PV < PL1;
PA2 active when PV < PL2.
dEV: PA1 active when PV-SP>PL1
PA2 active when PV-SP<PL2)
h/L
for
cn.1,
oFF
for
cn.2
PL1 Process Limit 1
Specifies the process or deviation
value which triggers the alarm
associated with PA1 as determined
by AiX.
100.0
PL2 Process Limit 2
Specifies the process or deviation
value which triggers the alarm
associated with PA2 as determined
by AiX.
0.0
Adb Alarm Deadband
Specifies the hystersis (gap)
between alarm trigger and reset.
This value is used to eliminate
repetitive alarm triggering when the
process is fluctuating about a
process limit. This value should be
set slightly larger then the peak-to-
peak fluctuations (noise) which are
normally present in the process
variable signal.
2.000
Pb Proportional Band (see Section 9.2)
Specifies the percent of process
deviation from setpoint over the
control range (ir) required to
generate a full scale output signal.
For a detailed discussion on control
and tuning, see Section 9. Values
should be limited between 2 to
1000%.
100.0
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-25
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
tr Reset Time (see Section 9.3)
Specifies the time in minutes
required for additional corrective
response equivalent to the
proportional response (integral
action). For a detailed discussion
on control and tuning, see Section
9. Values should be limited
between 0.02 and 200 minutes
/repeat. A value of 0.0 turns
integral action off.
0.0
td Derivative Time (see Section 9.4)
Specifies the time in minutes that
control response is advanced over
proportional only action. For a
detailed discussion on control and
tuning, see Section 9. Values
should be limited between 0.01 to 8
minutes. A value of 0.0 turns
derivative action off.
0.0
Mr Manual Reset
This value determines the position of
the output element (e.g., valve)
when the controller is in automatic
mode and the error is zero. It is only
in effect when tr is zero.
50.00
oh Output High Limit
Specifies in percent the maximum
allowable control output during
automatic operation. This limit also
affects outputs during manual
operations when hard manual limits
are turned on.
100.0
oL Output Low Limit
Specifies in percent the minimum
allowable control output during
automatic operation. This limit also
affects outputs during manual
operations when hard manual limits
are turned on.
0.0
oSr Output Slew Rate
Specifies in percent per second the
maximum allowable rate of control
output change during automatic
operation. A value of 0.0 indicates
that the control output rate of
change is not limited. Slew values
less than 2.0 may experience
decreased timing accuracy.
0.0
hML Hard Manual Limits
Specifies whether the output
high/low limits affect the output
during manual operations.
Selections:
oFF: control output is not limited
during manual operations.
on: control output is limited
between output high limit
and output low limit during
manual operations.
on
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
MFd Manual Fallback Disable
Selections are as follows:
on: On allows the controller auto/
manual selector to remain un-
changed if power is removed.
oFF: If oFF, the controller always
powers up with the selector in
the manual position.
oFF
ir
iLr
Instrument Range,
Instrument Lower Range
These values, given in engineering
units, define the vertical bar displays
end points and establish the width
of the proportional control band.
This allows the control range to be
set independent of the process
variable range.
%PV 100
,
,

(PV iLr)
ir

]
]
]
%SP 100
,
,

(SP iLr)
ir
]
]
]
(For the in.Ld control scheme, the ir
and iLr values scale the PV1 bar.)
100.0
0.0
Sh Setpoint High Limit
Specifies the maximum allowable
control setpoint in engineering units.
It is applied to all setpoint sources;
therefore, affecting remote set-
point, local setpoint, and tracking
(safety) setpoint.
(For the in.Ld control scheme, the Sh
value is the instrument range - ir, for
the PV2 bar.) (See ir/iLr above.)
100.0
SL Setpoint Low Limit
Specifies the minimum allowable
control setpoint in engineering units.
It is applied to all setpoint sources;
therefore, affecting remote
setpoint, local setpoint, and
tracking (safety) setpoint.
(For the in.Ld control scheme, the SL
value is the instrument lower range -
iLr, for the PV2 bar.) (See ir/iLr
above.)
0.0
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-26
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
SSr Setpoint Slew Rate
Specifies in engineering units per
second the maximum allowable
rate of setpoint change (or PV2 rate
of change for the in.Ld control
scheme). When employed, the
green bar represents the setpoint as
it is applied to control (slew limited),
while the green dro represents the
target setpoint value. A value of 0.0
indicates that the setpoint rate of
change is not limited. Slew values
less than 2.0 may experience
decreased timing accuracy.
0.0
StV Setpoint Track Value
Specifies in engineering units the
desired setpoint when the cS.L input
(SWSt) is 0 and the PVt (Process
Variable Tracking) path enable is
set to no. Using cS.L as the selector
control allows the setpoint track
value to be treated as either a
safety value or a fixed secondary
setpoint value. When PVT is set to
YES and the controller is not
operating in auto (PID output), the
setpoint track value is automatically
loaded with the current process
variable on the cS.A input (cS.b
input for loop 2). This provides
bumpless transfer from manual to
auto operation or from output
tracking to auto operation because
the setpoint is forced to match the
PV before the switch to auto is
made.
0.0
SPM
(cn.1
only)
Setpoint Mode Select
Determines the operation of the
setpoint push buttons when remote
setpoint operation is selected.
Selections:
Std: setpoint push buttons have
no affect when R is selected
with the R/L push button..
K-SP: setpoint push buttons modi-
fy K1( ratio) value when R
R is selected with the R/L
push button.
Std
K1 Remote Setpoint Ratio
This parameter and Remote
Setpoint Bias (b1) allow the remote
setpoint input to be modified prior
to input at the setpoint generator.
SP (RSP K1) + B1
1
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
b1 Remote Setpoint Bias
This parameter and Remote
Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the remote
setpoint to be modified prior to
input at the setpoint generator.
SP (RSP K1) + B1
0
cZ Control Zone
Specifies in engineering units an
area around the setpoint where the
process variable is considered to be
at setpoint (no error). When the
process variable is within this area,
the control output is held steady at
the integral value as determined by
tr and Mr. Control Zone is used to
reduce valve wear where process
dynamics cause output oscillations
(hunting) when the process is near
its setpoint.
cZ cZ
0.0
rSW Reverse Control Action
Specifies the output response
required to correct for process error.
Selections:
dir: output must increase to
eliminate a positive error
(PV-SP).
reV: output must decrease to
eliminate a positive error
(PV-SP).
rEV
dP Decimal Point Location
Fixes the location of the decimal
point in each dro for the operator
display. Selections:
PPPP: values between -999 and
9999.
PPP.d: values between -99.9 and
999.9.
PP.dd: values between -9.99 and
99.99.
P.ddd: values between -.999 and
9.999.
PPP.d
Section 7. Control Scheme Block 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
7-27
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
rSv
(cn.1
only)
Reverse Valve
Specifies whether 100% output
should be displayed in the output
(yellow) dro as 100% or 0%. This
allows the output dro to be set to
correspond to a preferred valve
representation of output.
Selections:
dir: 100% control output = 100%
displayed.
rEV: 100% control output = 0%
displayed.
dir
MMt
(cn.1
only)
Minimum Manual Jog Time
Designates the mode of manual
operation associated with the VuP
and Vdn logic signals. When MMt =
0, VuP and Vdn are always a pulse
width modulated (PWM)
representation of the control OUT
signal. The PWM period is
determined by the dcP parameter.
When MMt = non-zero, VuP and Vdn
are PWM representations in
automatic operation; however, in
manual operation, they are only
active when either of the output
push buttons is pressed. A non-zero
value entered for MMt represents in
percent the minimum duty cycle
period the logic values VuP and
Vdn will be a 1 whenever the output
push buttons are momentarily
depressed or when a networked
device generates an associated
push button operation.
Non-zero operation:
0.0
OUT
PB
VuP
dcP
Sec.
0 1 2 3 4 25 26 27 28 29 30
dcP = 30 seconds
MMt (MMt = 5% dcP)
Table 7-3. Control Selections
(conF Menu cn.1, cn.2 Modules)
Prompt Description Dft
dcP
(cn.1
only)
Duty Cycle Period
Specifies in seconds, the length of
the cycle period over which the
digital outputs VuP and Vdn are
calculated. This time must be set
based on the characteristics of the
final control element and the
amount of cycling permitted. For
minimum cycling of the final control
element, the period should be set to
match the end-to-end travel time of
the element. To operate the digital
outputs in a time proportioning
manner, much shorter cycle times
are required. Because each cycle
period is divided into 0.05 second
pieces, the resolution of the output
is determined by the length of the
cycle period. For example: If dcP is
10 seconds, then the period will
contain 200 pieces (10/0.05 = 200),
each being 0.5% of the 10 second
period. If the controller output
(OUT) value is 27.65 (%) at the start
of the period, then the VuP logic will
remain a "1" for 2.8 seconds (27.65%
rounded to the closest 0.5% = 28.1
or 28%; 0.28 x 10 seconds = 2.8
seconds). 2.8 seconds is equivalent
to 56 pieces. The cycle period will
be a "0" for the remainder of the
period, which is 7.2 seconds (144
pieces).
0.0
7.8 Control Scheme Signal
Connector Pin Assignments
Any one of six control strategies can be configured
very quickly from a defaulted controller (ProG-cS-
FiX = 98) by selecting the appropriate control
scheme and setting several parameters. The sig-
nal connector pin assignments vary for these con-
trol strategies as illustrated in Figure 7-21. The six
control strategies are covered as part of the infor-
mation provided in Section 8. The six control
strategies are as follows:
Single Loop Controller with Remote Setpoint
Single Loop Ratio Controller
Dual Loop Cascade Controller
Dual Loop High Limited Controller
Dual Loop Low Limited Controller
Auto/Manual Station
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 7. Control Scheme Block
7-28
Figure 7-21. Control Schemes Signal Connector Pin Assignments
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

7
.


C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
c
h
e
m
e

B
l
o
c
k
5
3
S
L
6
0
0
0

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
7
-
2
9
This section provides information to implement
eight commonly used control strategies:
Single Loop Control with Remote Setpoint.
Analog Back-up Control.
Ratio Control.
Auto/Manual Selector.
Single Station Cascade Control.
Single Station Override Control.
Dual Indicator with Re-Transmitted PV.
Proportional Speed Floating Control
Information for each strategy is presented in the
same order. There is a brief overview of the control
strategy operation with a process illustration and
an illustration of the signal connector pin assign-
ments, which is followed by descriptive sections of
the connector signals. The applicable parameters
that may require configuring are also included in
these sections.
Many signal paths can be altered in the controller.
To simplify the presentation, it is assumed the path
configuration selections are left at the factory set-
tings unless specified otherwise in the example.
Also provided, is a description of time proportional
output, which can be applied to any of the control
strategies presented in this section.
8.1 Single Loop Control with
Remote Setpoint
Single loop control with remote setpoint is the con-
troller standard factory set functionality (controller
default settings and the SnGL control scheme).
A single loop control strategy with remote setpoint
is illustrated in Figure 8-1. In single loop control, a
continuous output is calculated from the difference
between the process variable (AI1) feedback signal
sent from a field transmitter (e.g., flow meter) and
a setpoint (SP) value. The output is calculated with
the controller PID algorithm, which has propor-
tional, integral, and derivative terms. The effect
these terms have on the output calculation de-
pends on the PID configuration selections (Pb, tr,
and td). As the output (AO1) is determined, it is
applied to a final control element (e.g., valve) to
restore the process to the setpoint value.
The output can also be set manually at the control-
ler, whereby the PID algorithm calculation is not
used. The setpoint can be set locally at the control-
ler or it can originate from a remote source (AI2). If
the alarm limits are configured, the controller will
activate an annunciator whenever the PV exceeds
the configured tolerable limits of change.
Figure 8-1. Single Loop Application
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-2 and
the connector pin assignment descriptions are
provied in the sections that follow. These sections
also contain the applicable display prompts that
may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-2. Single Loop Signals
8.0 Eight Control Strategies
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-1
8.1.1 AI1 - Process Variable Input
This analog input signal value is compared to the
control setpoint to determine the control output
value.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For PV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.1.2 AI2 - Remote Setpoint Input
This analog input signal value is used as the con-
trol setpoint when remote (R) operation is selected
with the display panel push button and remote set-
point is enabled (closed) by DI2.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(Sh, SL, SSr).
8.1.3 DO1 - PV High Alarm Contact
Out
D01 is closed (on) when the process variable value
is not within the alarm limit 1 (PL1) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
8.1.4 DO2 - PV Low Alarm Contact Out
D02 is closed (on) when the process variable value
is not within the alarm limit 2 (PL2) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.1.5 DI1 - Force Control Output
Contact Input
This is a closed contact or low active signal (0-1 V
dc). When a closed contact or 0-1 V dc signal is
present on this input, the control output value is
applied to the value of Ai7 (the control scheme D
input accepts the force control value and cS.d is
defaulted to select Ai7).
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
To enter a Force Output value in register Ai7:
Section 5.2, ProG-Ai-Ai.7 or oPEr-Ai7.
8.1.6 DI2 - Remote Enable Contact
Input
This is a low active signal (0-1 V dc). When a 0-1
V dc signal is present on this input, the operator
can select the Remote Setpoint input at AI2 as the
setpoint value with the R/L push button. The Re-
mote LED flashes if the R/L push button is pressed
and this signal is not low to enable remote setpoint
control.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
None.
8.1.7 AO1 - Control Output
This is the 4-20 mA signal that drives the final
control element.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4, conF-cn.1-(Pb, tr,
td).
8.1.8 SchM Selection
Single loop control is implemented with the control-
ler default settings and SnGL (single loop) selected
from the SchM prompt of the cS module.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.6, ProG-cS-SchM.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-2
8.2 Analog Back-Up Control
The direct digital control/analog back-up strategy
is used in operations where a remote computer is
normally controlling the final element directly. It is
implemented with the controller default settings,
the SnGL control scheme, and the path connec-
tions provided on the next page in Section 8.2.8.
A control/analog back-up strategy is illustrated in
Figure 8-3.
With this control strategy, the controller functions
as a signal selector and automatic back-up unit to
the computer host. The controller assumes proc-
ess control in the event of a signaled computer
failure. The analog back-up controller operates as
a single loop controller when driving the process
final element (e.g., output valve).
While in back-up and automatic, the controller con-
tinually adjusts its output to match the AI2 control
element feedback signal so that transfer to online
operation is bumpless in the event of computer
failure. Selection of the computer or back-up con-
troller signals to the process final element is per-
formed by the controllers DO1 and DO2 modules
in conjunction with blocking diodes (see circuit dia-
gram in Figure 8-4). The computer drives the final
process element when remote operation is se-
lected with the controller R/L push button and digi-
tal input DI1 is closed (0-1 V dc); otherwise, the
computers control signal is diverted and the output
from the controller is the active signal to the proc-
ess final element. Unless DI2 input is open (4-24 V
dc signal), the controller is not permitted to operate
in automatic mode.
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-5 and
the connector pin assignment descriptions are pro-
vided in the sections that follow. These sections
also contain the applicable display prompts that
may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-3. Backup Control Application
Figure 8-4. Output Selector
Figure 8-5. Backup Control Signals
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-3
8.2.1 AI1 - Process Variable Input
This analog input signal value is compared to the
control setpoint to determine the control output
value.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For PV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.2.2 AI2 - Control Element Feedback
This is a feedback signal from the diverter circuit to
the controller that indicates the position of the final
element (e.g., valve) so that if operation transfer to
the controller becomes necessary, it will be bum-
pless.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
8.2.3 DO1 - Computer Output Diverter
When open, the computer output path is through
the diverter circuit diode to the final element (e.g.,
valve).
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
8.2.4 DO2 - Backup Output Diverter
When open, the controller output path is through
the diverter circuit diode to the final element (e.g.,
valve).
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.2.5 DI1 - Computer Ready
This is a low active signal (0-1 V dc) that enables
the computer to drive the final element when R is
selected with the R/L push button.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
None.
8.2.6 DI2 - Auto Enable
This is a high active signal (4-24 V dc) that enables
the controller to drive the final element when L is
selected with the R/L push button and the controller
is in automatic. The Auto LED flashes if the A/M
push button is pressed and this signal is not 4-24 V
dc to enable auto control.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
None.
8.2.7 A01 - Backup Control Output
This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the
final control element if operation is transferred from
the computer to the controller.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4, conF-cn.1-(Pb, tr,
td).
8.2.8 SchM Selection and Path
Connections
Analog control is implemented with the controller
default settings, control scheme 1, and SnGL (sin-
gle loop control) selected from the SchM prompt of
the cS module.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.6, ProG-cS-SchM.
Applicable path connections that are required:
ProG-cS-cS.b = Ao3.
ProG-cS-cS.d = Ai2.
ProG-cS-cS.h = di2 (inverted).
ProG-cS-cS.J = di1.
ProG-cS-cS.K = LG1.
ProG-LG-LG1.A = do8.
ProG-LG-LG1.M = Xor.
ProG-LG-LG3.A = rMt.
ProG-LG-LG3.M = And.
ProG-Ao-Ao3.i = SP.
ProG-do-do1.i = LG3.
ProG-do-do2.i = LG3.
ProG-do-inV1 = 0-on.
ProG-do-do8.i = LG3.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-4
8.3 Ratio Control
Ratio control is used where one variable, called the
controlled variable, must be automatically main-
tained in definite proportion to another variable,
called the wild variable. Ratio control is imple-
mented with the controller default settings, the
SnGL control scheme, and the ratio setpoint K-SP
selected from the setpoint mode (ConF-cn.1-SPM)
parameter. A ratio control strategy is illustrated in
Figure 8-6. Field transmitters (e.g, flow meters)
must be installed in each variable line. Signals
from the controlled and wild variable transmitters
(AI1 and AI2 respectively) are received by the con-
troller which compares them and calculates the re-
quired correction that is applied as an output signal
(AO1) to a final control element (e.g., valve) in the
controlled variable line. The final element in the
control l ed vari abl e l i ne i s moved to al ter li ne
throughput so that the predetermined ratio between
the two lines is maintained. The predetermined
ratio is set at the controller with the ratio/local (R/L)
push button in R. While in ratio control, the set-
point push buttons are used to set the desired ratio
value; when the R/L push button is in local control,
the setpoint push buttons modify only the setpoint
value. In local control, the controlled variable line
functions in single loop control mode.
Figure 8-6. Ratio Control Application
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-7 and
the connector pin assignment descriptions are pro-
vided in the sections that follow. These sections
also contain the applicable display prompts that
may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-7. Ratio Control Signals
8.3.1 AI1 - Controlled Variable Input
This is the controlled line analog input signal value
that must be maintained in proportion to the wild
variable input value.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For CV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.3.2 AI2 - Wild Variable Input
This is the wild variable analog input signal value
that determines the required controlled variable in-
put as specified by the ratio setting.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(Sh, SL, SSr, B1).
8.3.3 DO1 - Controlled Variable High
Alarm Contact Out
D01 is closed (on) when the controlled variable
value is not within the process alarm limit 1 (PL1)
setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
8.3.4 DO2 - Controlled Variable Low
Alarm Contact Out
D02 is closed (on) when the controlled variable
value is not within the process alarm limit 2 (PL2)
setting.
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-5
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.3.5 DI1 - Force Control Output
Contact Input
This is a closed contact or low active signal (0-1 V
dc). When a closed contact or 0-1 V dc signal is
present on this input, the control output value is
applied to the value of Ai7 (the control scheme D
input accepts the force control value and cS.d is
defaulted to select Ai7).
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
To enter a Force Output value in register Ai7:
Section 5.2, ProG-Ai-Ai.7 or oPEr-Ai7.
8.3.6 DI2 - Ratio Enable Contact Input
This is a low active signal (0-1 V dc). When a 0-1
V dc signal is present on this input, the operator
can select ratio operation with the R/L push button.
The R LED fl ashes i f the R/L push button i s
pressed and this signal is not low to enable ratio
control.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
None.
8.3.7 Control Output
This is the 4-20 mA signal that drives the final
control element.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4, conF-cn.1-(Pb, tr,
td).
8.3.8 SPM = K-SP
Ratio control is implemented with the controller de-
fault settings, control scheme 1, and K-SP selected
from the SPM prompt of the cn.1 menu.
Applicable parameter that requires configuration
change:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-SPM.
8.3.9 SchM Selection
Ratio control is implemented with the controller de-
fault settings and SnGL (single loop) selected from
the SchM prompt of the cS module.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.6, ProG-cS-SchM.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-6
8.4 Auto/Manual Selector
An auto/manual selector application is illustrated in
Figure 8-8. This application is implemented with
the controller default settings and the in.Ld control
scheme. The auto/manual selector default settings
allow auto-throughput when Auto is selected with
the A/M push button. In automatic, the signal on
AI2 is passed through to the stations output (AO1).
Manual operation occurs when M is selected with
the A/M push button. In manual, the station output
is controlled with the output push buttons. Transfer
from automatic to manual is bumpless. There is no
PID control performed by the automatic/manual se-
l ect or; however, t he stati on moni t ors AI1 for
alarmed conditions, which are signaled with DO1
and DO2. If DI1 is closed, the force output signal
appears at A01.
Figure 8-8. A/M Selector Application
The force output signal can be applied to an analog
input (e.g., universal analog input module AI3 or
AI4) from an external source, or it can be a con-
stant value entered into one of the controller analog
input registers. AI7 is shown in Figure 8-8 in pa-
renthesis to indicate the controller does not have
any optional AI inputs and that this value is a con-
stant that was entered into AI7.
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-9 and
the connector pin assignment descriptions are pro-
vided in the sections that follow. These sections
also contain the applicable display prompts that
may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-9. A/M Selector Signals
8.4.1 AI1 - Process Variable 1 Input
This analog signal is the designated input variable
that is checked to be within acceptable process
limits.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For PV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.4.2 AI2 - Process Variable 2 Input
(Auto)
This analog signal is gated through as the AO1
selector output if force output is not active and auto
is selected with the A/M push button.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
8.4.3 DO1 - PV1 High Alarm Contact
Out
D01 is closed (on) when the alarmed process vari-
able value, PV1, is not within the process alarm
limit 1 (PL1) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-7
8.4.4 D02 - PV1 Low Alarm Contact
Out
D02 is closed (on) when the alarmed process vari-
able value, PV1, is not within the process alarm
limit 2 (PL2) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.4.5 DI1 Force Output Contact Input
This is a closed contact or low active signal (0-1 V
dc). When a closed contact or 0-1 V dc signal is
present on this input, the control output value is
applied to the value of Ai7 (the control scheme D
input accepts the force control value and cS.d is
defaulted to select Ai7).
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
To enter a Force Output value in register Ai7:
Section 5.2, ProG-Ai-Ai.7 or oPEr-Ai7.
8.4.7 A01 - PV2 Re-Transmit (Auto)
This is the selected analog 4-20 mA output signal
that is sent to the final control element.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(ir, iLr).
8.4.8 SchM Selection
The auto/manual selector is implemented with the
control l er def aul t sett i ngs and i n. Ld (i ndi ca-
tor/loader) selected from the SchM prompt of the
cS module.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.6, ProG-cS-SchM.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-8
8.5 Single Station Cascade Control
A single station cascade control strategy is illus-
trated in Figure 8-10. This control strategy is imple-
mented with the controller default settings and
cASc control scheme. With single station cascade
control, two standard PID control loops function
together as a primary (loop 2) and secondary (loop
1). The output of the primary control loop, based
on its setpoint and process variable, becomes the
setpoint input to the secondary control loop. This
controller setup is suited to process applications
where the primary loop is usually slower than the
secondary loop. The cascade action overcomes
the slower process time lags of the primary loop by
providing more immediate response to changes in
the faster secondary loop, which in turn reduces
disturbances to the primary loop. Transfer be-
tween local and cascade control is bumpless be-
cause the primary controls output is forced to
match the secondary controls setpoint when the
secondary control is in local mode (this is indicated
by a blinking loop 2 manual LED). In the illustrated
application below, the temperature (primary vari-
able) of a liquid in a tank is maintained by regulat-
i ng col d wat er f l ow t o adj ust t ank j acket
temperature (secondary variable).
Figure 8-10. Single Station Cascade
Control Application
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-11
and the connector pin assignment descriptions are
provided in the sections that follow. These sec-
tions also contain the applicable display prompts
that may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-11. Single Station Cascade
Signals
8.5.1 AI1 - Secondary PV Input
This is the secondary process loop analog input
signal value that is compared to the primary control
output (setpoint in) to determine the control output.
Applicable menu prompts that may require configu-
ration changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For PV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.5.2 AI2 - Primary PV Input
This is the primary process loop analog input signal
value that is compared to the primary control set-
point to determine the output (setpoint) value fed
into the secondary process loop.
Applicable menu prompts that may require configu-
ration changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
8.5.3 DO1 - Secondary PV High
Alarm Contact Out
D01 is closed (on) when the secondary process
variable value is not within the loop 1 process
alarm limit 1 (PL1) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-9
8.5.4 DO2 - Secondary PV Low
Alarm Contact Out
D02 is closed (on) when the secondary process
variable value is not within the loop 1 process
alarm limit 2 (PL2) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.5.5 DI1 - Force Control Output
Contact Input
This is a closed contact or low active signal (0-1 V
dc). When a closed contact or 0-1 V dc signal is
present on this input, the control output value is
applied to the value of Ai7 (the control scheme D
input accepts the force control value and cS.d is
defaulted to select Ai7).
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
To enter a Force Output value in register Ai7:
Section 5.2, ProG-Ai-Ai.7 or oPEr-Ai7.
8.5.6 DI2 - Cascade Enable Contact
Input
When a low signal (0-1 V dc) is present on this
input and R (Remote) is selected with the R/L push
button, it enables cascade operation. The R LED
flashes if the R/L push button is pressed and this
signal is not low to enable cascade control.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
None.
8.5.7 Primary Output (the Setpoint
into the Secondary Loop)
The output of the primary loop is internally fed into
the secondary loop as the setpoint for that loop;
therefore, there is no signal connector designator.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.2-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.2-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4, conF-cn.2-(Pb, tr,
td).
8.5.8 AO1 - Control Output
This is the 4-20 mA signal that drives the final
control element.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4, conF-cn.1-(Pb, tr,
td).
8.5.9 SchM Selection
Cascade control is implemented with the controller
default settings and cASc (cascade control) se-
lected from the SchM prompt of the cS module.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.6, ProG-cS-SchM.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-10
8.6 Single Station Override Control
With Single Station Override Control, two standard
PID control loops function as two interdependent
variables, primary and limiting, to control a single
final element (e.g., valve). Neither variable may
exceed a safe limit. This control strategy is imple-
mented with the controller default settings and the
h.Li M or L.Li M (hi gh or l ow l i mi ti ng) control
schemes. The limiting control schemes are de-
faulted to use a value entered into cn.1-b1 parame-
ter as the second loop setpoint.
The primary loop of this control strategy is always
in control unless the output tries to exceed the high
(or low) limit imposed by the limiting loop. As a
high limit controller, the lowest output value is se-
lected to drive the final element via AO1. As a low
limit (high override) controller, the highest output is
selected to drive the final control element via AO1.
A typical high limit controller process application is
illustrated in Figure 8-12. In this application the
valve is normally adjusted in response to primary
variable (flow) disturbances unless the limiting vari-
able (pressure) loop has the highest output. When
this happens, the valve is closed to reduce pres-
sure. Pressure is the limiting variable because it is
the more critical value.
Figure 8-12. Single Station Override
Control Application
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-13
and the connector pin assignment descriptions are
provided in the sections that follow. These sec-
tions also contain the applicable display prompts
that may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-13. Single Station Override
Control Signals
8.6.1 AI1 - Primary PV Input
This is the primary loop analog input signal value
that is compared to the primary loop setpoint to
determine the required primary output. The pri-
mary output is used as the 4-20 mA drive signal for
the final control element if the selector determines
the primary loop should have process control.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For PV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.6.2 AI2 - Limiting PV Input
This is the limiting loop analog input signal value
that is compared to the limiting loop setpoint. The
output drives the high/low limiter, which affects the
primary output 4-20 mA final control element sig-
nal.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
8.6.3 DO1 - Primary PV High Alarm
Contact Out
D01 is closed (on) when the primary process vari-
able value is not within the loop 1 (cn.1) process
alarm limit 1 (PL1) setting.
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-11
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
8.6.4 DO2 - Primary PV Low Alarm
Contact Out
D02 is closed (on) when the primary process vari-
able value is not within the loop 1 (cn.1) process
alarm limit 2 (PL2) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.6.5 DI1 - Force Control Output
Contact Input
This is a closed contact or low active signal (0-1 V
dc). When a closed contact or 0-1 V dc signal is
present on this input, the control output value is
applied to the value of Ai7 (the control scheme D
input accepts the force control value and cS.d is
defaulted to select Ai7).
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
To enter a Force Output value in register Ai7:
Section 5.2, ProG-Ai-Ai.7 or oPEr-Ai7.
NOTE: If hard manual limiting
(conF-cn.1[cn.2]-hmL) is active, all output sources
including forced control output, will be controlled
by oh/oL (output high/output low). When using
forced control output as a safety output, do NOT
apply hard manual limiting, as it will override the
forced control output signal in manual
(deactivating hmL does not eliminate oh/oL in
automatic operation).
8.6.6 DI2 - Secondary Setpoint Enable
When a low signal (0-1 V dc) is present on this
input, it allows a value previously entered into the
conF-cn.1-b1 parameter to become the fixed set-
point. Factory default settings are assumed for this
control strategy; otherwise, the setpoint value may
not be determined only by the conF-cn.1-b1 pa-
rameter.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-b1
8.6.7 AO1 - Control Output
This is the 4-20 mA signal that drives the final
control element.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Primary:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related parameters:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4, conF-cn.1-(Pb, tr,
td).
Limiting:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.2-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
For control related prompts:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.2-(ir, iLr, Mr).
Sections 7.7, 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4, conF-cn.2-(Pb, tr,
td).
8.6.8 SchM Selection
This control strategy is implemented with the con-
troller default settings and hLiM or LLiM (high or
low limiting, as applicable) selected from the SchM
prompt of the cS module.
Applicable parameter that requires configuration
change:
Section 7.6 - ProG-cS-(SchM = h.LiM or L.LiM, as
applicable).
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-12
8.7 Dual Indicator with
Re-Transmitted PV
The Dual Indicator allows two process variables to
be displayed and either one to be selected as the
output at AO1. The process variables are input
into AI1 and AI2. A dual indicator application is
illustrated in Figure 8-14.
This application is implemented with the controller
default settings and the in.Ld control scheme.
Figure 8-14. Dual Indicator Application
The signal connector is illustrated in Figure 8-15
and the connector pin assignment descriptions are
provided in the sections that follow. These sec-
tions also contain the applicable display prompts
that may require configuration changes.
Figure 8-15. Dual Indicator Signals
8.7.1 AI1 - PV1 Input
Process Variable 1 is the analog signal that is
checked to be within acceptable process limits. It
can be re-transmitted as the selected controller
output.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF- Ai.1-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
For PV alarms:
Section 7.7, conF-cn.1-(AiX, PL1, PL2, Adb).
8.7.2 AI2 - PV2 Input
Process Variable 2 is a displayed analog signal
that can be re-transmitted as the selected control-
ler output.
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.2, conF-Ai.2-(SPan, ZEro, SQrt, bASE,
dFLt).
8.7.3 DO1 - PV1 High Alarm Contact
Out
D01 is closed (on) when the process variable 1
value is not within the cn.1 process alarm limit 1
(PL1) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV1.
8.7.4 DO2 - PV1 Low Alarm Contact
Out
D02 is closed (on) when the process variable 1
value is not within the cn.1 process alarm limit 2
(PL2) setting.
Applicable parameter that may require configura-
tion change:
Section 5.6, ProG-do-inV2.
8.7.5 A01 - Retransmitted PV1 or PV2
This is a re-transmitted output of either the PV1 or
PV2 input, depending on the Ao1.i path connection
(to Ai1 or Ai2).
Applicable parameters that may require configura-
tion changes:
Section 5.4, ProG-Ao-Ao1.i.
Section 7.7 - conF-cn.1-(oh, oL, hML, oSr, rSW,
rSV).
8.7.6 SchM Selection
The dual indicator is implemented with the control-
ler default settings and in.Ld (indicator/loader) se-
lected from the SchM prompt of the cS module.
Applicable parameter that requires configuration
change:
Section 7.6, ProG-cS-SchM.
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-13
8.8 Proportional Speed Floating
Control
This control output is suitable for any of the control
schemes where the final control element is usually
a motorized valve. The controller output is pro-
vided at two discrete outputs, rather than the ana-
log output AO1. One discrete output drives the
motor in one direction and the other discrete output
drives the motor in the opposite direction. The MS1
and MS2 indicators activate, depending on the DO
driving the motor. The discrete output logic asserts
for a period of time that is proportional to the quan-
titative requirement of the corrective action. The
greater the error, the longer the discrete output
logic will be asserted. If the deviation is zero and
there is no signal on either discrete output, the
motor can be at any position within its operating
range; therefore, the motorized valve is said to be
floating. Since the motorized valved is moved at a
speed proportional to the deviation, and floats
when there is no output signal, this output type is
called proportional speed floating control.
8.8.1 Motorized Valve Connections
The 2DI/2DO option module is required for propor-
tional speed floating control because the standard
discrete outputs DO1 and DO2 do not have relays.
It is NOT recommended that DO1 and DO2 be
used for this output application, as doing so
would require a motor interface (e.g., relays or
triac circuitry). An illustration of proportional
speed floating control output is provided in Figure
8-16. Also shown in the illustration are the wiring
connections at the 2DI/2DO module connector
TB2. The motor connections are not shown due to
product variations. The user must ascertain how
the leads are connected at the motor to cause it to
drive in the required direction for each active out-
put.
8.8.2 Configuration Requirements
Parameter inputs and path connections are re-
quired to initiate proportional speed floating con-
trol. The parameters affected apply only to control
module 1 (cn.1) of the conF menu and not control
module 2 (cn.2). The applicable path connections
and parameter entries are as follows:
Figure 8-16. Proportional Speed Floating
Control
Switch path connections (these switches can
be found in the cS module of the ProG menu):
ProG-do-do3.i should be at its default connec-
tion to Vup.
ProG-do-do4.i should be at its default connec-
tion to Vdn.
ProG-cS-doFb should be set to on if a valve
slide wire is to be used.
ProG-cS-cs.F should be connected to Ai.2.
This allows the slide wire feedback (see Figure
8-16) at Ai2 to be displayed in the yellow dro.
The value displayed is in percent of the valve
position and not percent output. This is an
optional connection because some valves do
not provide slide wire output.
Parameter entries:
Zero-out Manual Rest (conF-cn.1-Mr). Allow
full control range by setting output low-limit
(conF-cn.1-oL) to -100 and output high-limit
(conF-cn.1-oh) to 100.
Enter an output duty cycle value in seconds in
conF-cn.1-dcp. This value specifies, in sec-
onds, the length of the cycle period over which
the digital outputs VuP and Vdn are calculated.
This time must be set based on the charac-
teristics of the final control element and the
amount of cycling permitted. A shorter dcp
increases motor cycling and a longer dcp de-
creases motor cycling, which slows the control
response. For minimum cycling of the final
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-14
control element, the period should be set to
match the end-to-end travel time of the ele-
ment. To operate the digital outputs in a time
proporti oni ng manner, much shorter cycl e
times are required. Because each cycle period
is divided into 0.05 second pieces, the resolu-
tion of the output is determined by the length of
the cycle period.
For example: If dcP is 10 seconds, then the
period will contain 200 pieces (10/0.05 = 200),
each being 0.5% of the 10 second period. If
the controller output (OUT) value is 27.65 (%)
at the start of the period, then the VuP logic will
remain a "1" for 2.8 seconds (27.65% rounded
to the closest 0.5% = 28.1 or 28%; 0.28 x 10
seconds = 2.8 seconds). 2.8 seconds i s
equivalent to 56 pieces. The cycle period will
be a "0" for the remainder of the period, which
is 7.2 seconds (144 pieces). The dcp value
affects the discrete output pulse repitition fre-
quency. A dcp of 0 turns off VuP and Vdn.
Enter a minimum manual time in conF-cn.1-
MMt. This value designates the mode of man-
ual operation associated with the VuP and Vdn
logic signals. When MMt = 0, VuP and Vdn are
always a pulse width modulated (PWM) repre-
sentation of the control OUT signal. The PWM
period is determined by the dcP parameter.
When MMt = non-zero, VuP and Vdn are PWM
representations in automatic operation; how-
ever, in manual operation, they are only active
when either the of the output push buttons is
pressed. A non-zero value entered for MMt
represents in percent the minimum duty cycle
period the logic values VuP and Vdn will be a 1
whenever the output push buttons are momen-
tarily depressed or when a networked device
generates an associated push button opera-
tion.
Non-zero operation:
OUT
PB
VuP
dcP
Sec.
0 1 2 3 4 25 26 27 28 29 30
dcP = 30 seconds
MMt (MMt = 5% dcP)
Enter a value into conF-cn.1-Pb between 0.02
and 1000. The %Pb is determined from the
speed factor, which is calculated as follows:
Speed Fact or
j
,
(
% i nputdeviation
% output dut ycycl e
\
(
,
X 100
or Speed Factor = % deviation required for
maximum motor speed.
Because the controller operates as a devia-
tion-to-duty cycle converter and the motorized
control valve provides the integral action, the
total integral gain depends not only on the con-
troller Pb setting but also on the speed of the
valve. Integral gain is expressed as follows:
IntegralGain
j
,
(
SpeedFactorof Controller
full stroke travel t i me of valve i n seconds
\
(
,
Enter a control zone value to reduce motor
hunting in conF-cn.1-cZ. The peak-to-peak
value of noise or fluctuation of the process
signal must be smaller than the control zone
for stable operation. A control zone as wide as
possible should be entered to extend the serv-
ice life of the motorized valve operator.
Select the desired controller output-to-process
variable relationship (dir/rEV) with conF-cn.1-
rSW.
Scale the slide wire analog input 2 signal with
conF-cn.2-(SPAn, ZEro) as follows:
The limit switches in the valve operator should
be properly adjusted. Refer to the appropriate
manufacturer s i nstructions for details. In
manual operation, depress and hold the con-
trollers increase output or decrease output
push button. Check that the final control ele-
ment operates in the proper direction and that
the sl i de wi re valve i ndicator (yel low dro)
moves in the proper direction (0% represents
fully closed, 100% represents fully open). En-
sure the valve indicator tracks the valve posi-
tion.
Drive the valve fully closed and adjust the Ai.2
module conF-cn.2-ZEro parameter for 0% me-
ter position.
Drive the valve fully open and adjust the Ai.2
module conF-cn.2-SPAn parameter for 100%
meter position.
Section 8. Eight Control Strategies 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
8-15
8.8.3 Speed Factor Adjusting
1. If a slide wire is connected to AI2 instead of the
remote setpoint, ensure the remote/local push
button is set to local for setpoint adjustment or
that remote enable (ProG-di-di2) is set to 0.
2. Adjust the controller for zero deviation with the
setpoint push buttons or with the manual con-
trol output push buttons.
3. Switch the controller to auto by pressing the
auto/manual push button. The auto indicator
activates. The valve should not be moving in
either direction at this time. If the process per-
mits, move the setpoint 5% to cause a devia-
tion from the process variable. The process
variable bar should move as the deviation is
eliminated by action of the motorized valve. If
the process variable bar moves in the opposite
direction, check the conF-cn.1-rSW parameter
and/or the wiring from the 2DI/2DO module
TB2 DO3/DO4 outputs to the valve motor.
Check the process variable bar for oscillation.
4. Reduce the Pb value (increase Pb action) and
induce another deviation by moving the set-
point. Continue this procedure until a small
process oscillation is observed in the process
variable bar. If it is necessary to have a tighter
control zone, the conF-cn.1-cZ parameter can
be reduced; however, the value must not be
smaller than process signal noise fluctuations.
5. Increase the Pb value (reduce Pb action) by
approximately 30% for a stable operating mar-
gin.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 8. Eight Control Strategies
8-16
9.1 Overview
Commissioning is an iterative process of refining
the proportional band - Pb (Pb.2), integral or reset
time - tr (tr.2), and derivative time - td (td.2) pa-
rameter values for each active control module.
Collectively, these three control action parameters
are called the PID and can be accessed from the
oPEr menu if they are enabled for display with the
conF-OPr-Pi d.E parameter or they can be ac-
cessed from the conF-cn.1(cn.2) module. The val-
ues ent er ed f or t hese three paramet ers are
dependent upon the process application and de-
sired controller response to disturbances. It is not
necessary to have all three parameters active for
every process application. If a control strategy is
implemented that uses both control modules (cn.1
and cn.2), then the PID parameters for each control
module may require configuring.
9.2 Proportional Action (Pb)
In proportional action (conF-cn.1[cn.2]-Pb) there is
a comparative relationship between the controller
output signal magnitude and the calculated error,
which is the difference between the measured
process variable feedback and the desired set-
point. The proportional action of the controller is
set as a percentage of the proportional band (%PB)
from 2% to 1000%. If the %PB (Pb) is set at 2%, a
small percent change in error causes full scale out-
put signal magnitude (narrow proportional band).
Conversely, If the %PB (Pb) is set at 1000%, a
large percent change in error causes full scale out-
put signal magnitude (wide proportional band).
Because it is the process itself that provides the
feedback as the process variable, the controller
output must be correctly spanned to the maxi-
mum/minimum swing of the process control ele-
ment, and it is assumed the output signal sent to
the the process control element will positionally
alter it to null the calculated deviation error.
Process dynamics can therefore adversely affect
correct process control element positioning. For
example, two process disturbances that cause the
same calculated deviation error will not necessarily
cause a repositioning of the process control ele-
ment. As shown in the table, Disturbance 1 caused
an error of 3. The process control element position
was changed to overcome the error and restore PV
back to setpoint, but the cause of the disturbance
was not removed; therefore, the controller output
must remain at its new position to keep the PV at
10. With disturbance 2, an error of identical magni-
tude (3) is created; the process control element will
not move because i t i s al ready resti ng at i ts
spanned value for that output signal level even
though the process has not been restored to the
desired setpoint of 10. The cumulative effect on
process control of this inherent deficiency of pro-
portional action is called offset error (off from set-
point).
Disturbance SP PV Error Output Action
quiescent 10 10 0 no
change
none
1 10 7 3 new
value
change
process
control
element
position
quiescent 10 10 0 same as
for 1
none
2 10 7 3 same as
for 1
none
If offset error occurs within a tolerable range, it can
be ignored; if it occurs as an unacceptable value
with tolerable variances, it can be countered with
manual reset (Mr). There is an Mr prompt that that
can be accessed from each control module, cn.1 or
cn.2. Manual reset is entered as a value from 0%
to 100% output to compensate for the deviation
from setpoint that proportional action can not elimi-
nate. Because manual reset is entered as a fixed
value, it is limited with respect to process dynam-
ics. An alternative to manual reset is integral ac-
tion (tr).
9.3 Integral Action (tr)
Integral action (conF-cn.1[cn.2]-tr) augments pro-
portional action to cause the controller to drive the
process control element until the process deviation
i s nul led. It is sometimes called reset, whi ch
means return to setpoint. Integral action produces
a signal value that is a function of the deviation
from setpoint and the %PB setting. For example, if
setpoint was at 500F and the controlled process
temperature dropped down to 400F, there would
be a 100F deviation. If %PB had been set at 10%,
then the integral action in the first repetition interval
would be 10% x 100 or 0.1 x 100 = 10. The
process control element would be moved until tem-
perature increased an additional 10 from 400 to
410. In the second repetition interval, integral ac-
tion would be 10% x 90 or 0.1 x 90 = 9. The
9.0 Commissioning
Section 9. Commissioning 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
9-1
process control element would be moved until tem-
perature increased an additional 9 from 410 to
419. Integral action would continue at each repe-
tition interval until setpoint was reached. In this
way integral action sneaks-up on setpoint. The
time between repetition intervals can be set from
0.02 minutes/repeat (maximum integral action) to
200 minutes/repeat (minimum integral action); 0 is
off.
9.4 Derivative Action (td)
Derivative action (conF-cn.1[cn.2]-td) is used for
quick attainment of stability after sudden process
disturbances. It augments proportional action by
responding to the rate of change of the process
variable. If the error does not change, the output is
proportional only. The rate of change is the incre-
mental difference in the error with respect to an
incremental amount of time, which is the slope (rise
over run) of the error. Derivative action is entered
as time from a minimum value of 0.01 minutes to a
maximum value of 8 minutes; 0 is off.
9.5 Trial and Error Tuning Method
The trial and error tuning method is usually pre-
ferred for process loops that respond quickly, re-
quiring no waiting to determine steady cycling
process conditions. The steps to perform the trial
and error tuning method are as follows:
1. Set the process to approximately normal condi-
tions with the controller in manual mode.
2. Set the integral parameter conF-cn.1(cn.2)-tr
first to 0.02 for several moments, then set it to
200 to lock in a fixed reset value.
3. Set the proportional band parameter conF-
cn.1(cn.2)-Pb to 1000.
4. Set the derivative parameter conF-cn.1(cn.2)-
td to 0.01.
5. Switch to auto mode.
6. Slowly reduce the proportional band parameter
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-Pb from 1000 until process cy-
cling starts.
7. I ncr ease t he deri vat i ve parameter conF-
cn.1(cn.2)-td slowly from 0.01 until process cy-
cling stops.
8. Reduce the proportional band parameter conF-
cn. 1(cn.2)-Pb unt i l process cycl i ng starts
again.
9. I ncr ease t he deri vat i ve parameter conF-
cn.1(cn.2)-td again until cycling stops.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until no improvement can
be made when the deri vati ve parameeter
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-td is increased.
11. Increase the proporti onal band parameter
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-Pb to a safe margin approxi-
mately 1.5 times the value attained in steps 8
through 10.
12. Introduce integral action slowly by decreasing
the conF-cn.1(cn.2)-tr parameter until cycling
starts.
13. Back of f t he i nt egr al par amet er conF-
cn.1(cn.2)-tr to a safe margin about 1.5 times
the value attained in step 12.
9.6 Proportional Cycle Tuning
Method
The proportional cycle tuning method is an expedi-
ent procedure for slow processes. The steps to
perform this method are as follows:
1. Set the process to approximately normal condi-
tions with the controller in manual mode.
2. Set the integral parameter conF-cn.1(cn.2)-tr
first to 0.02 for several moments, then set it to
200 to lock in a fixed reset value.
3. Set the proportional band parameter conF-
cn.1(cn.2)-Pb to 1000.
4. Set the derivative parameter conF-cn.1(cn.2)-
td to 0.01.
5. Switch to auto mode.
6. Slowly reduce the proportional band parameter
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-Pb from 1000 until process cy-
cling starts.
7. When a slight cycle is repeatedly established,
measure the peak-to-peak period of oscillation
and record it as T minutes.
8. Observe the proporti onal band parameter
conF-cn.1(cn.2)-Pb setting and record it as P.
9. Using the multipliers provided, compute the
best settings as follows:
Proportional and integral (PI): Pb = 2P; tr
= 0.8T.
Proportional and derivative (PD): Pb =
0.8P; td = 0.12T.
Propor t i onal , i ntegral , and deri vati ve
(PID): Pb = 1.5P; tr = 0.5T; td = 0.12T.
9.7 Step Response Tuning Method
(Ziegler-Nichols)
The step response tuning method is another expe-
dient procedure for slow processes. The step re-
sponse tuning curve is illustrated in Figure 9-1 and
the steps to perform this method are as follows:
1. Set the process to approximately normal condi-
tions with the controller in manual mode.
2. Introduce a 10% (approximate) step change to
the controller output signal. Observe the mag-
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 9. Commissioning
9-2
nitude of the step in percent of full signal span
A. Also plot a graph of the resulting transient
curve traced by the controlled variable.
3. Draw a straight line tangent to a point on the
curve having the greatest slope (most linear).
4. Measure the apparent dead time Wp in min-
utes as shown in Figure 9-1.
5. Measure Tp, the product of the slope and dead
time as shown in Figure 9-1. This value should
be expressed in percent of full scale span.
6. Using the multipliers provided, compute the
best settings as follows:
Proportional (P): Pb = (100Tp)/A.
Proportional and integral (PI): Pb =
(100Tp)/A; tr = 3Wp.
Propor t i onal , i ntegral , and deri vati ve
(PID): Pb = (80Tp)/A; tr = 2Wp; td =
0.5Wp.
Figure 9-1. Typical Step Response Record
9.8 Easy-Tune
The Easy-Tune algorithm approximates a first or-
der time lag with gain and dead-time to determine
the opti mal PID characteri sti c constants. The
Easy-Tune sequence is graphically illustrated in
Figure 9-2. In the figure, the first step change is
used to calculate a preliminary estimate of the first
order time lag (Tp) and the dead-time (Wp) by
building an approximated process step response
curve model. Detailed illustrations of this approxi-
mation are shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-4. The
second step change, shown in Figure 9-2, is used
to calculate the process gain (Kp) measured as the
proportionality between the output step change and
process response. Using the same techniques il-
lustrated in Figures 9-3 and 9-4, the final estimates
for the time lag (Tp) and dead-time (Wp) values are
also made as the process step response curve
decays after the second step change is removed.
The values for Tp, Wp, and Kp, are then applied to
the ITAE (Integral Time Absolute Error) equations
given in Table 9-1. The equation results can be
previewed or allowed to be automatically entered
into the tuning constants P, I, D for the selected
loop. Values entered into the tuning constants are
limited to controller specifications as follows:
Proportional (EPb) 1000 - 2
Integral (Etr) 200 - 0.02, 0 (off)
Derivative (Etd) 8 - 0.01, 0 (off)
Before executing Easy-Tune the following must be
considered:
1. For slow processes, be sure the process vari-
able is steady before executing Easy-Tune.
2. Disturbance of the process during Easy-Tune
execution may result in a false process charac-
terization.
3. Feed forward control must be OFF.
4. If the ratio of process dead-time Wp and the
process time lag Tp is greater than 0.5, it is
recommended that the PID control mode be
used (e.g., cM = PID in Table 9-2).
5. Processes that act as pure integrators can not
be tuned by Easy-Tune because those proc-
esses have no self regulation, as only one
value of the controller output is able to cause a
steady state process.
6. In rare cases, a process response may not be
satisfactorily approximated as a first order time
lag with gain and dead-time.
Table 9-1. ITAE Equations
Mode Action Equation
P PB in %
204K p (
Wp
Tp
)
1.084
TR (Min) 0
TD (Min) 0
PI PB in %
116.4 Kp (
Wp
Tp
)
0.977
TR (Min)
Tp
40.44
(
Wp
Tp
)
0.68
TD (Min) 0
PID PB in %
73.69 Kp (
Wp
Tp
)
0.947
TR (Min)
Tp
51.02
(
Wp
Tp
)
0.738
TD (Min)
Tp
157.5
(
Wp
Tp
)
0.995
PD* PB in %
54.38 Kp (
Wp
Tp
)
0.947
TR (Min) 0
TD (Min)
Tp
157.5
(
Wp
Tp
)
0.995
*Empirical estimates not based on ITAE method.
Section 9. Commissioning 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
9-3
Figure 9-2. Easy-Tune Process
Figure 9-3. Preliminary Step Response -
Actual Curve
Figure 9-4. Preliminary Step Response -
Approximated Curve
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 9. Commissioning
9-4
9.8.1 Executing Easy-Tune
Easy-Tune is executed from the conF-EZ module
parameters. A typical controller display illustrating
Easy-Tune being executed is provided in Figure
9-5. Easy-Tune execution can be aborted at any
time by first pressing either output push button and
then by pressing the mode/select push button. Af-
ter the output push button is pressed, outX appears
in the SP dro and the Easy-Tune LED remains on
but stops blinking.
NOTE 1: For two loop cascade (cASc) control
schemes, the loop to be tuned is selected in
operator mode as the displayed loop before
executing Easy-Tune.
Also, in a cascade control scheme, loop 1
(secondary) is tuned first to the desired response
characteristics. It is then set to automatic with the
remote setpoint enabled before loop 2 (primary) is
selected and tuned.
The general rule for tuning cascade control is that
the secondary loop (loop 1) must be tuned tighter
and faster than the primary loop (loop 2);
otherwise, the setpoint of the secondary, which
comes from the primary, would vary more than the
secondarys process variable, resulting in poor
control of the primary loop.
The secondary process variable should not
overshoot the input setpoint from the primary by
more than 5 percent.
After the secondary is tuned, ensure the tuned
values conF-cn.1-Pb, conF-cn.1-tr, and
conF-cn.1-td are entered before the primary loop
(conF-cn.2-[Pb, tr, td]) is tuned.
The primary loop is selected in operator mode
before Easy-Tune is executed.
NOTE 2: For two loop high limit/low limit
(h.LiM/L.LiM) control schemes, the loop to be
tuned is selected in operator mode as the
displayed loop before executing Easy-Tune.
To tune loop 1 (primary), of a high/low limit
scheme, loop 2 (limiting) is set so that the output
changes used to tune loop 1 do not cause the
loop 2 limiting controller to modify the output
value, as this will give erroneous results. When
tuning loop 1 (primary) the hard manual limit
parameter conF-cn.1-hML is set to off.
To tune loop 2 (limiting) of a high/low limiting
scheme, the loop 2 (limiting) output is manually
adjusted to the desired process limiting value and
the loop 1 (primary) display is then selected in
operator mode and set to automatic. The
controller is placed in local and the setpoint push
buttons are used to move the loop 1 (primary)
setpoint to the extreme end of the instrument
range, either to the high end for high limiter or the
low end for low limiter. This setpoint value
ensures the loop 2 (limiting) output value plus the
DOUT +/- output step change value induced by
Easy-Tune do not interact with the setpoint. In
effect loop 1 (primary) is decoupled.
The steps to execute Easy-Tune are as follows:
1. Press and hold the mode/select pb to enter
engineering mode.
2. Press the scroll forward pb until the conF
prompt appears in the green dro.
3. Press the select pb.
4. Press the scroll forward pb until the EZ prompt
appears in the yellow dro.
5. Press the select pb; the first parameter prompt
(cM) appears in the green dro (it replaces
conF), and its value (P) appears in the red dro.
6. Press the select pb; the value in the red dro
starts blinking.
7. Press the scroll forward pb to alter/edit the red
dro value.
8. Press the select pb to enter the value.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to alter the remaining
parameters listed in Table 9-2. Selecting YeS
to the run? prompt, which is the last parameter
in Table 9-2, causes Easy-Tune to start exe-
cuting.
Section 9. Commissioning 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
9-5
Figure 9-5. Easy-Tune Display
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 9. Commissioning
9-6
Table 9-2. Easy-Tune Parameters
conF EZ
Prompt Description Dft
cM Control Mode
Select the desired control action(s) for
the process:
P, PI, PID, PD
If previous Easy-Tune results indicated
the ratio of process dead time - Wp
(WP) to the process time lag - Tp (tP)
was greater than 0.5, then PID should
be selected for control mode.
P
tLiM Limiting Settling Time
It is set to the time in seconds allowed
for the process to settle and the pre-
liminary step response to be detected.
0.0
dPV PV Excursion Limit
It is a percentage entered as a nu-
meric value that prevents excessive
changes in PV.
0.0
dout Output Step
It is set to the size of the output
change in percent that is used during
the tuning operation. This value can
be positive or negative, depending
on the direction of the output change
selected with the reverse parameter
(conF-cn.1-rSV). The value entered
should be large enough to cause
significant, but allowable PV changes
in the process.
0.0
dPPV Preliminary PV Step Disturbance
It is set to the change in PV required
to complete the preliminary step
operation. This value should be
approximately 1/4 th the expected
change caused by the setting of
dout. (This value is not 1/4 th of dout
because the expected PV change is
dependent upon process gain and
dout.)
2.0
PLiM Parameter Modify
Selecting on allows Easy-Tune to
modify the characterization values in
a conservative direction: that is,
overshoot is reduced compared to
control operation using the ITAE
calculated values.
oFF
APLd Automatic Tuning Parameter Entry
The default, oFF, indicates the
calculated tuning values for
parameters conF-cn.1(cn.2)-Pb, tr,
and td will not be automatically
entered, but available for review in
conF-EZ-EPb, Etr, and Etd (see Section
9.8.2, Easy-Tune Determined Values).
Change to on for automatic entry.
oFF
Table 9-2. Easy-Tune Parameters
conF EZ
Prompt Description Dft
run? Run Select
During execution, the Easy-Tune LED
flashes and tunE appears in the green
dro. Upon successful completion, the
Easy-Tune LED stops flashing and the
green dro no longer displays the tunE
mnemonic. If an error or warning
condition occurs during execution,
the Easy-Tune LED changes to a
steady-state-on condition and a
mnemonic is displayed in the green
dro that identifies the error or warning.
Pressing the mode/select push button
clears the display. After taking the
appropriate corrective action(s), Easy-
Tune can be restarted by selecting
YeS at the run? prompt in the EZ menu.
no
9.8.2 Easy-Tune Determined Values
The Easy-Tune calculated values can be viewed at
the prompts listed in Table 9-3. If conF-EZ-APLd
(in Table 9-2) was left at the default value (oFF),
then conF-EZ-EPb, Etr, and Etd values will not be
automatically written into the PID constants.
Table 9-3. Easy-Tune Determined Values
conF EZ
Prompt Description Dft
KP Easy-Tune calculated gain. 0.0
tP Easy-Tune calculated first order time
constant.
0.0
WP Easy-Tune calculated dead-time. 0.0
EPb Resultant %PB value calculated by
Easy-Tune.
0.0
Etr Resultant reset time value calculated
by Easy-Tune.
0.0
Etd Resultant derivative time value
calculated by Easy-Tune.
0.0
9.8.3 Easy-Tune Status Responses
If Easy-Tune responds with an error or warning
condition during execution, the tune LED changes
from a flashing to a steady-state-on condition and a
mnemonic appears in the green dro that identifies
the error or warning.
The Easy-Tune responses are provided in the sec-
tions that follow. After taking the appropriate cor-
rective action(s) for the error or warninig condition,
Easy-Tune can be restarted by selecting YeS at the
run? prompt in the EZ menu.
Section 9. Commissioning 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
9-7
9.8.3.1 out Response
This response indicates the controller output was
initially at extreme maximum or minimum when the
preliminary step change was attempted. Restore
the controller operating band to mid-range; if the
controller must operate at saturated output, then
Easy-Tune can not be successfully executed.
9.8.3.2 dout Response
This response indicates saturation would have oc-
curred if Easy-Tune had continued. Reverse the
sign of the step size configured into dout and exe-
cute Easy-Tune again.
9.8.3.3 dPV Response
This response indicates PV excursion exceeded
the limit specified in conF-EZ-dPV. Increase the
limit value specified in conF-EZ-dPV and execute
Easy-Tune again.
9.8.3.4 outX Response
This response indicates the controller output was
inadvertently altered. Refrain from altering control-
ler output during Easy-Tune execution.
9.8.3.5 StiM Response
This response indicates A time-out occurred during
initial settling. Process settling was not detected
during the time interval specified in conF-EZ-tLiM.
9.8.3.6 PtiM Response
This response indicates a time-out occurred during
the preliminary step change. The preliminary step
change could not complete in the time interval
specified in conF-EZ-tLiM. Increase the conF-EZ-
tLiM value or decrease the dPPV value.
9.8.3.7 WtiM Response
This response indicates a time-out occurred during
the preliminary estimate of Tp and Wp. A distur-
bance might have occurred during Easy-Tune exe-
cution causing the preliminary step excursion to
extend beyond the time limit of 20 step change time
intervals (shown as limit = 20X in Figure 9-2).
9.8.3.8 KtiM Response
This response indicates a time-out occurred during
the second step change. A disturbance might have
occurred during Easy-Tune execution causing the
second step change to extend beyond the approxi-
mated time of 10 Tps and Wps (shown as limit =
[2.5 Te + We][10] in Figure 9-2).
9.8.3.9 ttiM Response
This response indicates a time-out occurred during
the decay of the second step change. A distur-
bance might have occurred during Easy-Tune exe-
cution causing the second step change decay to
extend beyond the approximated time of 10 Tps
and Wps (shown as limit = [2.5 Te + We][10] in
Figure 9-2).
9.8.3.10 Abrt Response
This response indicates an intentional abort was
performed at the datalink host.
9.8.3.11 PidL Response
This response indicates a tuning parameter limit
was exceeded (e.g. exceeded 8 for conF-EZ-Etd)
during the execution of Easy-Tune. This is only a
warning, Easy-Tune completed execution and the
PID parameters were loaded as specified by conF-
EZ-APLd.
9.8.3.12 cM Response
This response indicates the selected tuning control
mode is illegal. Check conF-EZ-cM to see if P, PI,
PID, or D is selected.
9.8.3.13 cASc Response
This response indicates an illegal control mode
(conF-EZ-cM) is selected in the master or secon-
dary.
9.8.3.14 oVr Response
This response indicates the loop being tuned is
being overriden by the other loop. See note 2 in
Section 9.8.1.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Section 9. Commissioning
9-8
Additive
Feed
Forward
(FF)
Thi s analog i nput si gnal is
added to the PID result to
form the control scheme out-
put value when auto opera-
tion is active.
Analog
Back-up
Control
A control strategy whereby
the controller acts as an auto-
matic back-up device in the
event a host computor con-
trolling the process fails. This
cont r ol st r at egy i s i mpl e-
mented with the factory de-
fault settings, by selecting the
SnGL prompt for the ProG-
cS-SchM parameter, and with
pat h connect i ons used t o
drive the final element output
selector.
Analog
Input (AI)
An input that accepts a 0-20
mA or a 4-20 mA signal. The
53SL6000 controller has two
standard analog inputs and
can accept two optional ana-
log inputs via the universal
analog input module.
Analog
Input
Register
(Ai)
Analog input registers 1-4 re-
cei ve thei r hardware i nput
anal og val ues af t er si gnal
conditioning has been applied
t o t he anal og i nput s 1- 4.
(Hardware input to analog in-
puts 3 and 4 requires the op-
tional universal analog input
modul e.) Constant val ues
can be entered into all of the
anal og regi sters 1-8; how-
ever, if the register has an ac-
t i v e har dwar e i nput , t he
constant value will be over-
written.
Analog
Output (AO)
A standard 0-20 mA or 4-20
mA anal og si gnal is trans-
mi t t ed by t he c ont r ol l er
through analog output 1. It is
defined as a percent of output
value (percent of final control
element excursion from mini-
mum to maximum).
Auto/Manual
Selector
A control strategy whereby
the controller acts as a signal
pass-through device when in
aut o, wi t h capabi l i t i es t o
manual l y provide a control
out put i f necessary. Thi s
cont r ol st r at egy i s i mpl e-
mented in the 53SL6000 con-
troller with the factory default
settings and by selecting the
in.Ld prompt for the ProG-cS-
SchM parameter.
Bar
or
Vertical
Bar
An LED ladder used to dis-
play percent. The 53SL6000
cont rol l er has t wo vert i cal
bar s, each cont ai ni ng 40
LEDs: red, which is used pri-
marily to display the process
variable; and green, which is
used primarily to display the
setpoint.
Characterizer A 53SL6000 functional unit
t hat provi des si gnal val ue
modification via any one of
four operating modes: third
order polynomial, twelve seg-
ment l i near , set poi nt pro-
gr ammer , and di gi t al - t o-
analog converter.
Controller Refers to the 53SL6000 con-
t r ol uni t descri bed i n thi s
manual. Primarily, it is a de-
vice used to maintain process
qui escence at a predeter-
mined setpoint level.
Control
Scheme
The control scheme i s the
f undament al f unct i onal i t y
needed to calculate and pro-
duce the necessary output
control signal. There are five
control schemes provided in
the 53SL6000 controller that
can be used as the basis for
many cont r ol st r at egi es.
Each control scheme applies
to a unique area of process
control:
SnGL - for control strategies
Appendix A: Glossary
Appendix A. Glossary 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
A-1
requiring standard single loop
functionality.
cASc - for control strategies
requiring cascade functional-
ity.
L.LiM - for control strategies
requiring low limiting function-
ality.
h.LiM - for control strategies
requiring high limiting func-
tionality.
in.Ld - for control strategies
r equi r i ng i ndi cat or / l oader
functionality.
Control
Strategy
A 53SL6000 controller mode
of operation specified with a
selected control scheme, pa-
rameters, and path connec-
tions designed to meet the
specific application needs of
a controlled process.
Derivative
Action (td)
Derivative action (td) is used
for quick attainment of stabil-
ity after sudden process dis-
t ur bances. I t augment s
pr opor t i onal act i on by re-
s pondi ng t o t he r at e of
change of the process vari-
able. Derivative action is en-
tered as the time proportional
action is advanced, from 0.01
minutes (minimum action) to
8 minutes (maximum action);
0 is off.
Digital
Read-Out
(dro)
An LED field used to display
a l p h a n u me r i c s . T h e
53SL6000 cont r ol l er has
three dros: red, which is a
four character field used pri-
marily for the process vari-
abl e val ue i n engi neer i ng
units; green, which is a four
character field used primarily
for the setpoint value in engi-
neeri ng uni t s; and yel l ow,
whi ch i s a three character
field used pri maril y for the
output value expressed as a
percentage of the final control
element excursion or operat-
ing band.
Digital-
to-
Analog
Converter
Mode
An operati ng mode of t he
characterizer whereby values
are entered into chr parame-
t er const ant s K1 and K2,
which are used as multipliers
for the digital inputs at chr.b
and chr.c respectively. The
pr oduct of ( chr . b) ( K1) i s
added to the characteri zer
base val ue ( not user ac-
cessable) and the product of
(chr.c)(K2) is subtracted from
the characterizer base value.
It is the interaction of these
two inputs, chr.b and chr.c on
the base that causes the ana-
log output
Discrete
Input (DI)
Discrete inputs 1-4 are input
enables that can also be used
as event indicators to gener-
ate logic levels based on the
applied input voltage. (Dis-
crete inputs 3 and 4 require
the 2DI/2DO option module.)
The remainder of the discrete
inputs 5-8 do not receive in-
puts from external sources.
Discrete
Output (DO)
Discrete outputs 1-4 convert
logic levels to hardware con-
t act condi t i ons. (Di screte
outputs 3 and 4 require the
opti onal 2DI/2DO modul e.)
The remainder of the discrete
outputs 5-8 do not provide ex-
ternal outputs from the con-
troller.
Display
Panel
The 53SL6000 cont r ol l er
functionality for the faceplate
push buttons and LEDs.
Dual
Indicator with
Re-Transmitted
Process
Variable
A control strategy whereby
two analog inputs can be dis-
played and either one can be
selected as the re-transmitted
output. This control strategy
is implemented with the fac-
tory default settings and by
selecting the in.Ld prompt for
ProG-cS-SchM parameter.
Easy-Tune The 53SL6000 cont r ol l er
automati c tuni ng al gori thm
that approximates a first or-
der time l ag with gain and
dead-time to determine the
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix A. Glossary
A-2
opt i mal PID characteri sti c
constants.
Faceplate The entire visable front of the
controller casework that con-
tains the push buttons and
LEDs.
Final
Control
Element
The actual device used to al-
ter the process medium (e.g.,
flow, heat, gas density, etc.)
level under control.
Integral
Action (tr)
Integral action (tr) produces a
value that is a function of the
deviation from setpoint and
the %PB setting. It augments
proportional action to drive
the process final control ele-
ment unti l the devi ati on i s
nulled. Integral action is set
as the time between repitition
i nt er v al s f r om 0. 02 mi n-
utes/repeat (maximum action)
to 200 minutes/repeat (mini-
mum action); 0 is off.
Light
Emitting
Diode
(LED)
A diode that emits photon en-
ergy in response to electrical
impulses. In the 53SL6000
control l er, an LED can be
used as an indicator, in which
case it appears on the display
as a single light point source
(e.g., the "1" LED on the dis-
pl ay t hat i ndi cat es l oop 1
when active); or LEDs can be
grouped together for a spe-
cific function (e.g., each char-
acter position of a dro has
seven LEDs that are available
to create the displayed char-
acter and one LED for the
decimal point).
Logic
Block
A logic block can perform any
one of ei ght Boolean func-
tions on two inputs. The func-
tions are: A OR B, A AND B,
A XOR B, A OR NOT B, A
AND NOT B, NOT A OR B,
NOT A AND B, and NOT A
XOR B. There are four logic
blocks in the 53SL6000 con-
troller as part of the discrete
i nput/output deci si on path.
As determined by path con-
necti on capabi li ti es, two of
the logic blocks are primarily
for the discrete inputs (DIs)
and two are for the discrete
outputs (DOs). The discrete
output logi c blocks can be
connected with path selec-
tions to accept logic decisions
from the discrete input logic
blocks.
Loop
Control
with
Remote
Setpoint
A control strategy whereby a
continuous analog output sig-
nal or discrete output logic
signals are calculated based
on the difference between a
process variable input and a
setpoint. The setpoint can be
set locally or received from a
remote source. This control
strategy is implemented in the
53SL6000 controller with the
factory default settings and
by selecting the SnGL prompt
for the ProG-cS-SchM pa-
rameter.
Math Function
Block
The math function block pro-
vides nine different equations
capable of computing from a
maximum of six Fnc parame-
ter constants (K1-K6) and
four analog inputs (A-D) to
produce an augmented ana-
log output. A logic output is
also provided as a state indi-
cator for the limiter equations.
It can also accept two logic
inputs to choose any one of
four selector equations.
Menu One of three prompts: oPEr,
conF, and ProG that can be
invoked on the display in en-
gi neer mode. The oPEr
menu provides operator ac-
cess to commonly used pa-
rameters that must first be
enabl ed from the conF-oPr
module. The conF and ProG
menus each provide a suite of
modules that contain parame-
ters used to configure control-
ler operation.
Module An optional unit (e.g, RS-232
module) that can be installed
at the rear of the 53SL6000
controller case.
Appendix A. Glossary 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
A-3
Also, a prompt that can be in-
voked on the display in engi-
neer mode (e. g. , cn. 1); i f
selected, it provides scrolling
capabilities through a series
of parameter prompts for con-
figuration purposes.
Parameter One of many prompts subor-
dinated to a selected module
of the conF or ProG menus,
or a prompt in the oPEr menu,
that solicits configuration in-
put. Configuring a parameter
may require data to be en-
tered, a YES/no choice to be
made, or a selection made
from a list of items that ap-
pear sequentially in the red
d r o a s t h e s c r o l l f o r-
ward/backward push buttons
are pressed.
Pass-Key Two pass-keys can be config-
ured for the 53SL6000 con-
troller. A pass-key is a four
digit numeric value entered in
the red dro in response to the
key query to gain access to
either the conF menu or the
Pr o G menu i n engi neer
mode.
PID A mnemonic that represents
the proportional, integral, and
derivative actions caused by
the control scheme algorithm
output.
Process
Variable
The process feedback input
signal provided by a measur-
ing transmitter device that is
computed against the control-
ler setpoint to determine the
deviation error and required
output to null the error.
Prompt An engineer mode alphanu-
meric assigned to a menu,
module, or parameter that ap-
pears in a dro.
Proportional
Action (Pb)
Proportional action (Pb) pro-
duces a value calculated from
the di fference between the
setpoint and process variable
values. Proportional action is
set as a percentage of the
proportional band (%PB) from
2% (narrow band - maximum
action) to 1000% (wide band -
minimum action).
Proportional
Speed
Floating
Control
Thi s t i me pr opor t i onal or
three step output is applica-
bl e t o al l of t he c ont r ol
schemes. The controller out-
put is provided as hardware
contact levels from DO3 and
DO4 that are proportional to
the quantitative requirements
of the corrective action. It is
especially useful for motor-
ized control valves, whereby
the DO3 output dri ves the
valve in one direction and the
DO4 output drives the valve
in the opposite direction.
Push
Button
Any one of seven t act i l e
swi tches on the 53SL6000
controller faceplate used for
display panel operations.
Ratio
Control
A control strategy whereby
t he cont rol l er mai ntai ns a
process variable in relation to
a measured wi l d vari abl e.
This control strategy is imple-
mented in the 53SL6000 con-
troller with the factory default
settings, by selecting SnGL
for the ProG-cS-SchM pa-
rameter, and by selecting
K-SP for the setpoint mode
parameter conF-cn.1-SPM.
RS-232
Module
An opt i on modul e t hat at-
t aches t o t he r ear of t he
53SL6000 controller case to
provi de personal computer
RS-232 COMM port connec-
tivity.
RS-485
Module
An opt i on modul e t hat at-
t aches t o t he r ear of t he
53SL6000 controller case to
provide datalink connectivity.
Setpoint A displayed controller value
that represents a desired qui-
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix A. Glossary
A-4
escent pr ocess oper at i ng
level.
(Setpoint)
Programmer
Mode
An operati ng mode of t he
characterizer that allows 13
time intervals to be defined
with ProG-chr parameter con-
stants K1-K13. Values en-
t er ed i nt o chr par amet er
constants K14-K26 are the
ramp values for each of the
time intervals.
Single
Station
Cascade
Control
A control strategy whereby
t he cont rol l er response t o
process changes is enhanced
by using two loops for an oth-
erwise singl e l oop appli ca-
tion. The primary loop, which
calculates a deviation output
f r om a sl ower respondi ng
process provides the i nput
setpoint to a secondary loop.
The secondary l oop cal cu-
lates a deviation output from
the primary loop setpoint in-
put and a process variable
f r om a f ast er r espondi ng
process to alter the final con-
trol element position. This in
turn affects the sl ower re-
spondi ng process and ul ti-
mat el y t he pr i mar y l oop
set poi nt output. Cascade
control is much tighter than
single loop control, as the sin-
gle loop would calculate a de-
viation only from a predefined
setpoint and a process vari-
able from the slower respond-
i ng process. Thi s cont rol
strategy is implemented in the
53SL6000 controller with the
factory default settings and
by sel ect i ng cASc f or t he
ProG-cS-SchM parameter.
Single
Station
Override
Control
A control strategy whereby
two loops, primary and limit-
ing, operate interdependently
to control a final single ele-
ment. With this strategy, nei-
ther variable may exceed a
safe limit. The primary loop
is in control unless its output
tries to exceed the high or low
limit defined by the limiting
loop. If the high limit is ex-
ceeded, the controller will se-
l ect t he l ower of t he t wo
output values (low override).
If the low limit is exceeded,
the controller will select the
higher of the two output val-
ues (high override). The low
limit control strategy is imple-
mented with the factory de-
fault settings and by selecting
the L.LiM for the ProG-cS-
SchM parameter. The hi gh
limit control strategy is imple-
mented with the factory de-
fault settings and by selecting
the h.LiM for the ProG-cS-
SchM parameter.
Switch A symbol used in the control
scheme set poi nt-devi ati on,
PID, and output path illustra-
ti ons that physi call y repre-
sent s a cont r ol si gnal or
possible control scheme pa-
rameter selection choices.
Third
Order
Polynomial
Mode
An operati ng mode of t he
characterizer that provides a
monotonically increasing in-
dexing capability to five third
order polynomi al equations
that represent five adjacent
segment s. Each segment
represents a defined control-
ler output. Equation selection
i s specified with the ProG-
chr-K1 through K6 parame-
ters and values entered into
ProG-chr-K7 through K26 pa-
rameter constants are the co-
efficients A through D of the
five equations.
Tuning The i t erat i ve procedure of
finding the optimal controller
PID (proporti onal , i ntegral,
and derivative) values as re-
quired for the process under
control.
Twelve
Segment
Appendix A. Glossary 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
A-5
Linear
Mode
An operati ng mode of t he
characterizer whereby values
are entered into ProG-chr-K1
through K26 parameter con-
stants as 13 ordered pairs (A
input, analog output) to spec-
ify a 12 segment linear ap-
pr oxi mat i on of t he anal og
input signal. Constants K1-
K13 are the A input variables,
and constants K14-K26 are
the analog output variables.
Pairs are matched K1, K14;
through K13, K26. The input
variables must be monotoni-
cally increasing.
2DI/2DO
Module
An opt i on modul e t hat at-
t aches t o t he r ear of t he
53SL6000 controller case to
provi de two addi ti onal di s-
crete i nputs (DI3 and DI4)
and two additional discrete
outputs (DO3 and DO4).
Universal
Analog
Input
Module
An opt i on modul e t hat at-
t aches t o t he r ear of t he
53SL6000 cont r ol l er case
that provides analog input 3
or analog inputs 3 and 4. A
universal analog input mod-
ule can accept high voltage
level, low voltage level, ther-
mocouple, resistive thermal
device (RTD), frequency, and
pulse input types. Input sig-
nal char act er i zat i on and
shaping are performed by the
module, such as data lineari-
zation, cold junction compen-
sat i on ( CJC) , f i r st or der
digital filtering, and engineer-
ing unit conversion.
Watchdog A controller failure indicating
the controller central process-
ing unit (CPU) is malfunction-
ing or that another failure has
occurred that manifests itself
as a CPU failure. Watchdog
has a dedi cat ed f acepl at e
LED that i l l umi nates when
this indicator is active.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix A. Glossary
A-6
B.1 Overview
This section provides a parts list and maintenance
procedures to replace the display assembly and
power supply board, to execute the self-test, and to
initialize the database. Also provided is calibration
information for the controller analog inputs and out-
puts.
B.2 Parts List
The controller parts breakdown is illustrated in Fig-
ure B-1 and the corresponding parts list is provided
in Table B-1. Item numbers in the table correspond
to the callouts in Figure B-1.
Appendix B: Maintenance and Parts List
Figure B-1. Illustrated Parts Breakdown
Appendix B. Maintenance and Parts List 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
PARTS B-1
WARNING: Always remove power before
attempting to install, disassemble, or service the
controller. Failure to remove power may result in
serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION: - Use a grounded wrist strap to prevent
damage to integrated circuit devices when handling
circuit boards.
NOTE: - When communicating with Bailey-Fischer
& Porter for replacement parts, reference the
controllers serial number to ensure the correct
replacement is supplied. The necessary ordering
information is provided on the instrument data tag
and on the manufacturing specification sheet
supplied with the controller.
Table B-1. Parts List
Item
Number
Part Number Description
1 698B235U01 Display Assembly
(Bezel, Display Board,
Front Membrane, and
Gasket)
2 333B016U01 Gasket only
3 173D078U01 Cable Assembly
4 686B736U01 Power Supply - 120/240 V
AC
4 Power Supply - +24 V DC
5 324A528U01 Case - Molded
6 353F064U01 Mounting Bracket only
7 396C272U01 Screw for mounting
bracket
8 090H022U01 Ground Screw
9 172G440U01 Plug - 3P
10 172G440U03 Plug - 12P
11 682A550U01 Single Universal AI3
Module
11 682A550U02 Dual Universal AI3/AI4
Module
12 172F464U04 Plug - 8P
13 172F464U03 Plug - 6P
14 172F464U01 Plug - 4P
15 682A551U01 2DI/2DO Module
16 014F010T10 4-40 x 5/8 Screw
17 172F464U02 Plug - 5P, RS-422/485
17 172F464U07 Plug - 5P, RS-232
18 682A552U01 RS-422/485 Module
18 682A552U02 RS-232 Module
19 014F004T10 4-40 X 1/4 Screw (2 per
module)
20 101W796U01 Retainer (O-Ring - 2 per
module)
21 338F104U01 Identification Tags
(Strip of 3 tags)
Table B-1. Parts List
Item
Number
Part Number Description
22 355J093U01 Black Mounting Collar -
Single Unit
22 614B836U01 Black Mounting Collar - 2
Unit
22 614B836U02 Black Mounting Collar - 3
Unit
22 614B836U03 Black Mounting Collar - 4
Unit
22 614B836U04 Black Mounting Collar - 5
Unit
22 614B836U05 Black Mounting Collar - 6
Unit
22 614B836U06 Black Mounting Collar - 7
Unit
22 614B836U07 Black Mounting Collar - 8
Unit
22 614B836U08 Black Mounting Collar - 9
Unit
22 614B836U09 Black Mounting Collar - 10
Unit
23 107J013U01 Screwdriver
B.3 Removal and Replacement
Ensure the power is off and disconnect the power
cable plug. Disconnect all cable shield connec-
tions from the ground stud; remove the signal plug
and any option modules from the rear of controller.
A single screw secures the RS-232 or RS-485 mod-
ule to the casework; and the slot A and slot B
option modules are each secured to the casework
with two screws.
The display assembly is secured to the case by
bezel tabs that extend from the assembly into the
case. As shown in Figure B-2, to remove the dis-
play assembly, gently press in the bezel tab with
the screwdriver tip to release it from the case de-
tent, then slide the display assembly forward just
enough so the tab notch is passed the detent. Re-
peat for the remaining four bezel tabs to remove
display assembly from case. Disconnect the cable.
The display assembly must be replaced as a unit
because the display board is staked in place.
Lever latches secure the power supply board inside
the case. Gently pull each lever tab at the back of
the case as the power supply board edge is tilted
passed the lever latch inside the case. The board
comes straight forward out of the case.
Replacement: connect cable to new power supply
board and insert it in case until it is latched. Power
sockets, signal connectors, and ground stud should
be properly aligned with case cut-outs. Connect
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix B. Maintenance and Parts List
B-2 PARTS
cable to new display assembly. To maintain envi-
ronmental seal, ensure the rectangular gasket is
placed on the bezel. Slide bezel tabs into case and
push the assembly forward until tabs latch in case
detents.
Install all option modules at the rear of the control-
ler; connect the signal plug and connect cable
shields to the ground stud. Connect power plug.
Visually check all connections before applying
power.
Figure B-2. Bezel and Lever Tabs
B.4 Controller Confidence Test
Procedure
Confidence test mode causes a suite of tests to be
executed continuously by the controller until it is
taken out of confidence test mode or until an error
occurs.
B.4.1 Jumper Connections for the
Controller Confidence Test
To prepare the controller for the confidence test,
reference Figure B-3 and make the following con-
nections:
1. Power Plug (TB1): ensure it is correctly wired
to the appropriate power source (see Section
2, Installation).
2. Signal Plug (J12):
1.0 Kohm 1% resistor between +24V
and AI2.
Jumper AI1 to AO1.
Jumper DO1 to DI1.
Jumper DO2 to DI2.
3. Communications Jack (J13):
If no communication module is installed,
the conF-SYS-dLE parameter should be
set to oFF.
If an RS-485 Module is installed, then
jumper the following module terminal pins:
Jumper between R+ and T+.
Jumper between R- and T-.
If an RS-232 Module is installed, then
jumper the following module terminal pins:
Jumper between TXD and RXD.
Jumper between the two pins marked N.C.
4. 2DI/2DO Module Jack (J10):
If this module is not installed, then jumpers
are not required.
If the 2DI/2DO Module is installed, then
jumper the following module pins:
Jumper between 2DI-DI3 and 2DO-NO3.
Jumper between 2DI-COM and 2DO-DO3.
Jumper between 2DI-DI4 and 2DO-DO4.
Jumper between 2DO-NC3 and 2DO-NC4.
Jumper between 2DO-NO3 and 2DO-NO4.
5. Universal Analog Input Module Jack:
If this module is not installed, then jumpers
are not required.
If the Universal Analog Input Module is in-
stalled, then jumper the following module
terminal pins:
Plugs 1 and 2 (when either or both are
present):
392 ohm 1% resistor between IN- and I1.
Jumper between IN+ and I1.
24.9 Kohm 1% resistor between AI- and I2.
Jumper between AI+ and I2.
Jumper between IN- and RET.
Jumper between AI- and RET.
Appendix B. Maintenance and Parts List 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
PARTS B-3
Figure B-3. Confidence Test Connections
B.4.2 Starting the Controller
Confidence Test via the
Faceplate Push Buttons
The confidence test is started by simultaneously
pressing both the left and right output (bottom)
push buttons while cycling power to the controller
from off to on. Prior to test execution, the panel
display first cycles all LEDs on for three seconds,
then displays the firmware revision identifier value
in the yellow dro, the option A status code in the
red dro, and the option B status code in the green
dro for another three seconds.
All tests are automatically selected by entering the
confidence test from the faceplate. The push but-
ton tests are the first that must be performed, as
indicated by the KEYS prompt in the green dro.
The last test to be performed is the WdoG (watch-
dog circuit) test. Both, the KEYS and WdoG tests
require operator intervention. If these tests are re-
moved from the test suite, the controller will con-
tinue cycling through all remaining tests without
operator intervention.
NOTE: A test can be passed over and removed
from the test suite by pressing any push button
during its execution.
Power can be cycled during testing. When power
is cycled, the test suite is restarted with the first
selected test of the suite unless a failure was pre-
viously detected.
B.4.3 Starting the Controller
Confidence Test via
Datalink
To initiate the confidence test through the datalink,
configure the test suite select parameter byte,
TEST_FLGS (0x9FA), to activate the desired tests
by setting the corresponding bit in the byte:
TEST-FLGS.0 - KEYS
TEST-FLGS.1 - ROM and RAM
TEST-FLGS.2 - COMM
TEST-FLGS.3 - AIO
TEST-FLGS.4 - DIO
TEST-FLGS.5 - WDOG
TEST-FLGS.6 - OPTA
TEST-FLGS.7 - OPTB
After the TEST_FLGS byte is configured, set the
SYSFIX (0x800) byte to 197.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix B. Maintenance and Parts List
B-4 PARTS
B.4.4 Controller Confidence Test Suite
During confidence test execution, both vertical bars
are and all annunciator LEDs except WD are lit, the
red dro indicates the number of times all the se-
lected tests in the suite have been executed, rolling
over after 9999 passes. The green dro contains
the mnemonic of the test currently being exe-
cuted.
The complete test suite contains the following tests
that execute in the order given in Table B-2:
Table B-2. Confidence Test Suite
Test Description
KEYS Push button test. This test requires each
push button to be pressed to be
completed successfully. The LEDs
immediately adjacent to the push
buttons will light to indicate which push
buttons have been pressed; otherwise,
they will be off. When the KEYS test is
completed the test is automatically
deselected so that further action is not
required for each successive test suite
pass.
roM ROM checksum validate.
rAM RAM address and data check.
coMM Serial port (datalink) and option port
check. The COMM portion of the test is
activated if the conF-SYS-DLE parameter
is set to on; otherwise, it will not be
performed. (For datalink, conF menu and
SYS module are respectively 0x859 and
0x02.)
Aio Standard analog inputs, outputs, and
transmitter power check.
dio Standard digital inputs and outputs
check.
oPtA Slot A Option I/O check.
oPtb Slot B Option I/O check.
WdoG Watchdog trip. When this test is selected,
the suite halts at the end of the pass
because it requires a power cycle for
completion. Remove this test from the
suite for continuous testing by pressing
any one of the push buttons during its
execution.
B.4.5 Controller Confidence Test Status
If a test fails, the two vertical bars start flashing, the
red dro contains the pass count when the error was
detected and the green dro indicates the test cur-
rently being executed. If the test that failed is the
coMM, Aio, or dio tests, then the yellow dro will
contain the subtest number when the failure was
detected. When a test failure occurs, no further
testing is performed; therefore, the only way to re-
start testing is to exit, then re-enter the confidence
test. Test failure information is not lost through
power cycles. Subtest descriptions for the coMM,
Aio, and dio tests are provided in Table B-3 as
follows:
Table B-3. Factory Subtest Descriptions
Green
dro
Yellow
dro
Subtest
coMM 1 Serial port check.
2 Serial RTS/CTS check.
3 Option port check.
Aio 1 AI2 reading transmitter power
supply.
2 AI1 reading AO1 with 1 percent
output.
3 AI1 reading AO1 with 50 percent
output.
4 AI1 reading AO1 with 100
percent output.
dio 1 DI1 reading DO1, DI2 reading
DO2; both DOs open.
2 DI1 reading DO1, DI2 reading
DO2; DO1 closed, DO2 open.
3 DI1 reading DO1, DI2 reading
DO2; DO1 open, DO2 closed.
4 DI1 reading DO1, DI2 reading
DO2; both DOs closed.
B.4.6 Exiting the Controller
Confidence Test via the
Faceplate Push Buttons
To exit the confidence test with the front panel push
but t ons, pr ess any push but t on except t he
mode/select pb while controller power is cycled off
and then on again. When exited this way, the data-
base is automatically defaulted.
B.4.7 Exiting the Controller
Confidence Test via
Datalink
To exit the confidence test via the datalink without
defaulting the database, load the SYSFIX byte
(0x800) with a value of 0.
To exit the confidence test via the datalink and
defaul t t he database, l oad t he SYSFI X byte
(0x800) with a value of 98.
NOTE: Unless the database is defaulted after the
confidence test, the unit can not be configured via
the front panel push buttons.
Appendix B. Maintenance and Parts List 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
PARTS B-5
B.5 Defaulting the Database
The database can be restored to the factory set
default values by entering a 098 into the ProG-cS-
FiX parameter using the following procedure:
NOTE: Pass-keys will not be preserved if the
database is defaulted.
1. Enter engineer mode by pressing and holding
the mode pb. OPEr appears in the green dro.
2. Press the scroll forward pb until ProG appears
in the green dro.
3. Press the enter pb to accept the ProG menu.
4. If cS does not appear in the yellow dro, press
the scroll forward pb until it does.
5. Press the enter pb to accept the cS prompt;
SchM (scheme, the first parameter) appears in
the green dro and the control scheme prompt
that was active (e.g., SnGL for single loop)
appears in the red dro.
6. Press the scroll forward pb until the end of the
cS prompt list is reached, which is indicated by
the FiX prompt. Each time the scroll forward
pb is pressed, a new parameter name appears
in the green dro and its default setting appears
in the red dro.
7. Press the enter pb to accept the FiX prompt;
the first digit in the red dro starts blinking.
8. Use the scroll forward pb to make the first digit
a 0.
9. Press the shift right pb so that the second digit
starts blinking.
10. Use the scroll forward pb to make the second
digit a 9.
11. Press the shift right pb so that the third digit
starts blinking.
12. Use the scroll forward pb to make the third digit
an 8. 098 now appears in the red dro, but the
8 is still blinking.
13. Press the enter pb to accept the 098. Three
zeros appear in the red dro. The green dro still
contains FiX and the yellow dro still contains
cS. The setpoi nt verti cal bar indi cates a
stopped condition with four separately lit areas
(no continuous bar).
14. Press the mode pb; oFF starts blinking in the
red dro. Press the scroll forward pb to change
oFF to run and press the enter pb to exit engi-
neer mode.
B.6 Analog Input/Output
Calibration Values
The calibration values can be validated and altered
using 53HC2600 SL6 Configurator software appli-
cation package running on a personal computer.
Reference the software documentation and/or help
screens to display the Ai1, Ai2, and Ao1 biAS and
GAin prompts. Using the SL6 configurator, enter
the values from the calibration sheet into these
prompts.
The calibration values for the universal analog in-
put module can be validated and altered from the
controller display panel. See Table 5-8 for a list of
the calibration prompts and see Section 3 for dis-
play panel procedures in engineer mode.
NOTE: The factory set calibration constants for
the analog inputs and analog outputs were
recorded on the instrument calibration sheet
provided with the controller. As stated in the note
on the Trademarks page in the front of the book,
this sheet should have been retained in the event
one or more of the constants was inadvertently
changed to the wrong value, necessitating field
recalibration.
B.7 Watchdog LED
The location of the watchdog LED on the controller
faceplate is illustrated in Figure B-4. When active,
all outputs are forced to their power-off state. The
watchdog LED will activate for any one of three
conditions:
1. Central Processing Unit (CPU) failure on the
display board or any other controller failure
that manifests itself as a CPU failure by caus-
ing the CPU to malfunction.
2. Electrical input is not within the stated specifi-
cations provided in Section 1.3.
3. Environmental specifications stated in Section
1.3 are exceeded.
Figure B-4. Watchdog LED
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix B. Maintenance and Parts List
B-6 PARTS
C.1 Overview
Thirty-two addressable controllers (0-31) can be
connected to a datalink for information transfer
to/from a host, which initiates all transactions.
This section provides information to configure the
system module (prompts iA, bAUd, dLP, dLS, and
dLE), a description of the datalink protocol mes-
sage field definitions, a summary table of the con-
t r o l l e r me mo r y a d d r e s s s c h e me , a n d a
mnemonic-datapoint cross reference table
unit-tagatom transfers.
C.2 Configuring the System
Module for Datalink
To initiate the controller for datalink communica-
tions, respond to the system module prompts with
new values/selections if the default (Dft) settings
shown in Table C-1 requires changing.
Table C-1. System (SYS) Prompts (Datalink)
(conF Menu SYS Module)
Prompt Description Dft
iA Instrument Addrsss
It is the address assigned to this
controller on the datalink. Valid
addresses are from 0 - 31. No two
controllers can have the same
address on the datalink.
0
bAUd Baud Rate
This value is set to match the data
transfer rate of the datalink. Valid
menu selections are:
110 4800
300 9600
600 19.2K
1200 14.4K
2400 28.8K
9600
dLE Datalink Enable
Selections are as follows:
on: Allows controller datalink
communication.
oFF: The controller is not permitted
to communicate over the
datalink.
on
dLP Datalink Parity
Selections are as follows:
on: It indicates parity generation
and checking for even parity
serial byte protocol is enabled.
oFF: It indicates no parity protocol.
on
Table C-1. System (SYS) Prompts (Datalink)
(conF Menu SYS Module)
Prompt Description Dft
dLS Datalink Stuffing
Selections are as follows:
on: Selects F&P byte stuffing which
inserts a NULL (00) byte after
every SOH (7E hex) that is not
the beginning of a message.
This permits user written
communications software to
determine the number of bytes
to expect in a response
message.
oFF: Disables datalink stuffing.
on
tAG Tag Name
Allows a 10 character datalink tag
to be assigned to the controller.
Four characters maximum can be
displayed at any one time. Using
the engineer mode shift right push
button, the ten character positions
are displayed as follows:
0123 3456 6789
Characters are selected for each
position with the scroll
forward/backward push buttons.
C.3 Protocol
The datalink protocol requires the host to initiate all
transactions. There are two basic categories for all
of the datalink message types: interrogate, which
is used to read data from an addressed controller,
and change, which is used to alter a value in an
addressed controller. The addressed controller de-
codes the message and provides an appropriate
response. The protocol message field definitions
are provided in Table C- 2.
Table C-2. Datalink Protocol
Symbol Description
SOH Start of Header
This character, 7E, denotes the beginning
of a message.
I.A. Instrument Address
The address of the controller responding
to the transaction. It must be within a
range of 00-1F (00-31 decimal).
Appendix C: Datalink Protocol
Appendix C. Datalink Protocol 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
C-1
Table C-2. Datalink Protocol
Symbol Description
CMD Command
It is the operation to be performed or a
description of the message that follows
the Command-I.A. byte. The Command-
I.A. byte has two fields: the Command
field (3 bits) and the I.A. field (5 bits).
There are five commands as follows:
Interrogate, Change, Change Bits,
Acknowledge, and Response.
NUM Number
The number of data bytes transferred or
requested. The NUM must be a range of
00-32 decimal.
LO-ADD Lower Address Bits
The least significant 8 bits of a 16 bit
controller address.
HI-ADD Higher Address Bits
The most significant 8 bits of a 16 bit
controller address.
DATA An 8 bit data byte.
XXXX Represents a variable number of data
bytes.
MASK Has a 0 in every bit position that is
selected to be forced to 0.
STATE Has a 1 in every bit position that is
selected to be forced to 1.
LRC It is the sum of all bytes Modolo 256 of the
message not including the SOH character
or its own bit settings (LRC). It is written at
the end of the message to ensure data
was not lost in transmission.
C.3.1 Message Types
The types of messages that are sent from the host
to the controllers on the datalink are formatted as
follows:
Host to Controller:
1. Interrogate - This message requests up to 20H
consecutively stored bytes, beginning at the
specified memory address location of the ad-
dressed controller.
01111110 E0H + I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD LRC
2. Change - This message sends up to 20H bytes
of new data to the addressed controller.
01111110 A0H + I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD
Data 1 XXXXXXXXX Data N LRC
3. Change Bits - This message alters only the
specified bits in the specified bytes in the ad-
dressed controller. (NUM = 2N.)
01111110 COH + I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD
Mask 1 State 1 XXXX Mask N State N LRC
4. Acknowledge - This message signals the ad-
dressed controller that its last echoed change
message was received correctly; the controller
performs the change requested.
01111110 80H + I.A.
Controller to Host:
1. Response - This message furnishes the data
requested by the Interrogate command of the
host. It is also used to echoe back the pre-
vious Change message of the host.
01111110 20H + I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD Data
1 XXXXX Data N LRC
C.3.2 Transaction Examples
Example A - The host requests 9 bytes of data
beginning at hexadecimal memory address 1000H
from the controller at datalink address 03.
1. Host sends Interrogate message.
01111110 11100011 00001001 00000000
SOH Cmd + I.A. NUM LO ADD
00010000 11111100
HI ADD LRC
2. Controller sends response message.
01111110 00100011 00001001 00000000
SOH Cmd + I.A. NUM LO ADD
00010000 XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX YYYYYYYY
HI ADD Data 1 . . . . . . . Data 9 LRC
Example B - The host sends 2 bytes of new data,
to be loaded into the controller at datalink address
03 beginni ng at hexadecimal memory address
1000H.
1. Host sends Change message.
01111110 10100011 00000010 00000000
SOH Cmd + I.A. NUM LO ADD
00010000 00001000 00001100 11001001
HI ADD Data 1 Data 2 LRC
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix C. Datalink Protocol
C-2
2. Controller sends Response message.
01111110 00100011 00000010 00000000
SOH Cmd + I.A. NUM LO ADD
00010000 00001000 00001100 01001001
HI ADD Data 1 Data 2 LRC
3. Host sends Acknowledge message.
01111110 10000011
SOH Cmd + I.A.
4. The controller performs the change requested
at the end of the current scan.
C.4 Mnemonic-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
Many of the mnemonic prompts are actually alpha-
numeric representations of datapoint parameters
that are used to configure controller operation.
There are six datapoint types which are briefly de-
scribed in Table C-3. In the data format description
of the table, subscripts H and D are used to denote
hexadecimal and decimal numbers respectively.
Table C-3. Datapoint Types
Data-
Point
Size Data Format Description
B 1
byte
It is a positive integer from 0 to 255.
L 1 bit A single binary bit with a logical
value of 0 or 1.
C 3
bytes
A floating point value that has a
resolution of one part in 32,768 and
a dynamic range of 10
38
. The first
two bytes represent a 2s
complement notation in fractional
form (2
-n
) whose absolute value is
between 0.5 and 0.9999. The third
byte is the power of 2 in 2s
complement notation. (See Figure
C-1 for examples.)
H 5
bytes
A floating point value that has a
resolution of one part in 2 billion
and a dynamic range of 10
38
.
The first four bytes represent a 2s
complement notation in fractional
form (2
-n
) whose absolute value is
between 0.5 and 0.9999. The fifth
byte is the power of 2 in 2s
complement notation.
(See Figure C-1 for examples.)
A 10
bytes
A text string that is 10 characters
maximum.
Table C-3. Datapoint Types
Data-
Point
Size Data Format Description
F 5
bytes
A text string that is 5 characters
maximum. Type F datapoints are a
subset of the type A datapoints
and therefore have the same
memory assignment area.
C.4.1 Database Starting Addresses
Table C-4 provides the starting address and the
number of datapoints for each data type in the
53SL6000 controller.
Table C-4. Database Starting Addresses
Type Start
Address
Number of
Elements
Size of
Element
B 0800H 75 1
L 084BH 128 1/8
C 085BH 124 3
H 09CFH 5 5
A-F 09E8H 2-4 10-5
C.4.2 Controller Memory Address
Scheme
The location of the datapoint in the controller mem-
ory can be calculated from the base address for
that datapoint type. The datapoint types, with their
base addresses and memory location algorithms,
are provided in Table C-5 (subscripts H and D are
used to denote hexadecimal and decimal numbers
respectively).
Table C-5. Datapoint Addresses
Type Base
Addr
Address
Calculation
B 0800H Address = B Base + (B Number)
= 800H + (B Number)
Address example: B012 location
= 0800H + 12D = 800H + CH = 80CH
L 084BH Address = L Base + (L Number/8)
= 84BH + (L Number/8)
Remainder = bit position in byte
Address example: L014 location
= 84BH + 14/8 = 84CH, bit 6
(remainder).
C 085BH Address = C Base + (3 X C Number)
= 85BH + (3 X C Number)
Address example: C011 location
85BH + (3 X 11) = 85BH + 33D
= 85BH + 21H = 87CH.
Appendix C. Datalink Protocol 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
C-3
Table C-5. Datapoint Addresses
Type Base
Addr
Address
Calculation
H 09CFH Address = H Base + (5 X H Number)
= 9CFH + (5 X H Number)
Address example: H001 location
9CFH + (5 X 1) = 9CFH + 5D = 9CFH +
5H = 9D4H.
Table C-5. Datapoint Addresses
Type Base
Addr
Address
Calculation
A
and
F
09E8H Address = A Base + (10 X Number)
= 9E8H + (10 X Number)
Address example: A015 location
9E8H + (10 X 15) =
9E8H + 150D = 9E8H + 96H
A7EH.
Address = F Base + (5 X Number)
= 9E8H + (5 X Number)
(For F data type within A database.)
2
0
sign bit
2
-1
0.5
2
-2
0.25
2
-3
0.125
2
-4
0.0625
2
-5
0.03125
2
-6
0.015625
2
-7
0.0078125
2
-8
0.00390625
2
-9
0.001953125
2
-10
0.0009765625
2
-11
0.00048828125
2
-12
0.000244140625
2
-13
0.0001220703125
2
-14
0.00006103515625
2
-15
0.00003051757813
2
-16
0.00001525878906
2
-17
0.000007629394531
2
-18
0.000003814697266
2
-19
0.000001907348633
2
-20
0.0000009536743164
2
-21
0.0000004768371582
2
-22
0.0000002384185791
2
-23
0.0000001192092895
2
-24
0.00000005960464477
2
-25
0.00000002980232239
2
-26
0.00000001490116119
2
-27
0.000000007450580596
2
-28
0.000000003725290298
2
-29
0.000000001862645149
2
-30
0.0000000009313225745
2
-31
0.0000000004656612873
2
-32
0.0000000002328306436
Two examples of C and H floating point value calculations.
(Note: calculator values are approximations of the controller values given in the
first line of each example.)
Example 1:
Value as nearest C 1111.0000000000000000 45 70 0B
Calculator check (calculator numbers are rounded):
0100 0101 0111 0000 x 2
0B
or 0100 0101 0111 0000 x 2
11
(Sum of Exponents -1, -5, -7, -9, -10, -11) x 2
11
= .5 + .03125 + .0078125 + .001953125 + .0009765625 + .00048828125
x 2048
= 0.542480468 x 2048 = 1110.999998 1111
Value as nearest H 1111.0000000000000000 45 70 00 00 0B
Calculator check (calculator numbers are rounded):
0100 0101 0111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 x 2
0B
or
0100 0101 0111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 x 2
11
(Sum of Exponents -1, -5, -7, -9, -10, -11) x 2
11
= .5 + .03125 + .0078125 + .001953125 + .0009765625 + .00048828125
+ .0 + .0 + .0 + .0 + .0 x 2048
= 0.542480468 x 2048 = 1110.999998 1111
Example 2:
Value as nearest C 0.09999847412109375 66 66 FD
Calculator check (calculator numbers are rounded):
0110 0110 0110 0110 x 2
FD
or 0110 0110 0110 0110 x 2
-3
(Sum of Exponents -1, -2, -5, -6, -9, -10, -13, -14) x 2
-3
= .5 + .25 + .03125 + .015625 + .001953125 + .0009765625 +
.0001220703125 + .00006103515625 x 0.125
= 0.799987792. x 0.125 = 0.099998474 0.1
Value as nearest H 0.09999999997671694 66 66 66 66 FD
Calculator check (calculator numbers are rounded):
0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 x 2
FD
or
0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 0110 x 2
-3
(Sum of Exponents -1, -2, -5, -6, -9, -10, -13, -14, -17, -18, -21, -22, -25, -26
-29, -30) x 2
-3
= .5 + .25 + .03125 + .015625 + .00195313 + .00097656 +.00012207 +
.000061035 + .00000763 + .00000382 + .000000468 + .000000238 +
.0000000298 + .0000000149 + .00000000186 + .000000000931 x 0.125
= 0.799999998491 x 0.125 = 0.0999999998 which is close to the
Figure C-1. Floating Point Examples
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix C. Datalink Protocol
C-4
C.4.3 Database Prompt-to-Datapoint
Cross Reference
Table C-6 is provided as a parameter prompt-to-
datapoint cross reference.
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
Ai1 Ai C114
bASE L088
cALS C066
cALZ B018
dFLt B004
SPAn C062
SQrt L089
ZEro C064
Ai2 Ai C115
bASE L096
cALS C067
cALZ B019
dFLt B005
SPAn C063
SQrt L097
ZEro C065
Ai3 Ai C116
Ai4 Ai C117
Ai5 Ai C118
Ai6 Ai C119
Ai7 Ai C120
Ai8 Ai C121
Ao1 Ao C069
bASE L104
cALS C068
cALZ B020
Ao2 Ao C070
Ao3 Ao C071
chr K01 C088
K02 C089
K03 C090
K04 C091
K05 C092
K06 C093
K07 C094
K08 C095
K09 C096
K10 C097
K11 C098
K12 C099
K13 C100
K14 C101
K15 C102
K16 C103
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
chr
(cont)
K17 C104
K18 C105
K19 C106
K20 C107
K21 C108
K22 C109
K23 C110
K24 C111
K25 C112
K26 C113
[LStP] B022
StEP B021
[tiMER] C122
Appendix C. Datalink Protocol 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
C-5
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
cn.1 Adb C005
AE L034
AiX B011
Aut L027
b1 C012
[co] C023
ctc L043
cZ C014
dcP C030
[dn] H001
dv C021
dP B009
FF C022
hML L042
iLr C016
ir C015
K1 C013
MFd L040
MMt C031
Mr C011
oh C009
oL C010
oSr C018
otE L039
otV C029
out C002
oVtS L025
PA1 L030
PA2 L031
Pb C006
PL1 C003
PL2 C004
[Pn] C024
PV C000
rE L035
rF C027
rMt L028
[rn] H000
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
cn.1
(cont)
[rSP] C020
rSV L029
rSW L026
Sh C025
SL C026
SP C001
SPM B010
SPtS L024
SSr C017
StE L038
StV C028
SWA L032
SWoVt L037
SWr L033
SWSPt L036
td C008
tr C007
[tSP] C019
Vdn L044
VuP L041
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix C. Datalink Protocol
C-6
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
cn.2 Adb C037
AE L058
AiX B014
Aut L051
b1 C044
[co] C055
ctc L067
cZ C046
[dn] H003
dv C053
dP B012
FF C054
hML L066
iLr C048
ir C047
K1 C045
MFd L064
Mr C043
oh C041
oL C042
oSr C050
otE L063
otV C061
out C034
oVtS L049
PA1 L054
PA2 L055
Pb C038
PL1 C035
PL2 C036
[Pn] C056
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
cn.2
(cont)
PV C032
rE L059
rF C059
rMt L052
[rn] H002
[rSP] C052
rSV L053
rSW L050
Sh C057
SL C058
SP C033
SPM B013
SPtS L048
SSr C049
StE L062
StV C060
SWA L056
SWoVt L061
SWr L057
SWSPt L060
td C040
tr C039
[tSP] C051
di1 di L000
di2 di L001
di3 di L002
di4 di L003
di5 di L004
di6 di L005
di7 di L006
di8 di L007
do1 do L008
inV L016
do2 do L009
inV L017
do3 do L010
inV L018
do4 do L011
inV L019
do5 do L012
inV L020
do6 do L013
inV L021
do7 do L014
inV L022
do8 do L015
inV L023
Appendix C. Datalink Protocol 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
C-7
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
EZ [Abrt] L074
APLd L073
cM B016
dout C075
dPV C074
dPPV C072
EPb C079
Etd C081
Etr C080
KP C077
LPS B015
nrun L076
PLiM L072
run L075
StS B017
tLiM C073
tP C076
WP C078
Fnc K01 C082
K02 C083
K03 C084
K04 C085
K05 C086
K06 C087
oPr Ai.E L123
ALM.E L124
di7.E L120
di8.E L121
EZ.E L127
hLc.E L126
Pid.E L125
StP.E L122
PrG Ao1.i B043
Ao2.i B044
Ao3.i B045
chr.M B038
chr.A B039
chr.b B053
chr.c B054
do1.i B067
do2.i B068
do3.i B069
do4.i B070
do5.i B071
do6.i B072
do7.i B073
do8.i B074
doFb B041
EXrF B042
FiX B000
Table C-6. Prompt-to-Datapoint Cross
Reference
DBase Module DBase
Parameter
Network
Reference
Fnc.M B033
PrG
(cont)
Fnc.A B034
Fnc.b B035
Fnc.c B036
Fnc.d B037
Fnc.E B046
Fnc.F B047
LG1.M B055
LG1.A B056
LG1.b B057
LG2.M B058
LG2.A B059
LG2.b B060
LG3.M B061
LG3.A B062
LG3.b B063
LG4.M B064
LG4.A B065
LG4.b B066
PVt B040
PVt.2 B052
SchM B026
cS.A B027
cS.b B028
cS.c B029
cS.d B030
cS.E B031
cS.F B032
cS.h B048
cS.J B049
cS.K B050
cS.L B051
SYS bAUd B002
cKEY F003
dLE L113
dLP L112
dLS L114
iA B001
oPtA B006
oPtb B007
PKEY F002
tAG A000
C.5 Executing Controller Self Tests
via Datalink
The procedure to execute the controller self tests
via the datalink can be found in Appendix B, Main-
tenance and Parts List.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix C. Datalink Protocol
C-8
[0]: Logic level zero.
0.0: The value zero.
0.05: Digital filter in seconds.
0.1: Digital filter in seconds.
0.3: Digital filter in seconds.
0.6: Digital filter in seconds.
0.7: Digital filter in seconds.
0 to 13: Characterizer step mode list.
0-20: 0-20 mA input.
0 to 31: Instrument addresses 0 to 31.
0-80: 0-80 millivolt universal Ai option.
0-5V: 0-5 volts analog input.
[1]: Logic level one.
1.0: The value one.
1.5: Digital filter in seconds.
1.8: Digital filter in seconds.
1-5V: 1-5 volts analog input.
3.1: Digital filter in seconds.
3SEG: Segment third order polynomial.
3TrM: 3 wire RTD.
4.2: Digital filter in seconds.
4-20: 4-20 mA input.
4TrM: 4 wire RTD.
6.3: Digital filter in seconds.
9.0: Digital filter in seconds.
10c: 10 ohm copper RTD.
12.7: Digital filter in seconds.
18.6: Digital filter in seconds.
25.5: Digital filter in seconds.
37.2: Digital filter in seconds.
51.1: Digital filter in seconds.
53c: 53 ohm copper RTD.
75.0: Digital filter in seconds.
100c: 100 ohm copper RTD.
102: Digital filter in seconds.
110: 110 baud.
100n: 100 ohm nickel RTD.
120n: 120 ohm nickel RTD.
150: Digital filter in seconds.
205: Digital filter in seconds.
300: 300 baud.
300: Digital filter in seconds.
410: Digital filter in seconds.
600: 600 baud.
600: Digital filter in seconds.
819: Digital filter in seconds.
1200: 1200 baud.
1200: Digital filter in seconds.
1638: Digital filter in seconds.
2400: 2400 baud.
4800: 4800 baud.
9600: 9600 baud.
14.4K: 14,400 baud.
19.2K: 19,200 baud.
28.8K: 28,800 baud.
Adb: Alarm deadband.
Ai: Analog input module.
Ai1: Analog input 1 value.
Ai2: Analog input 2 value.
Ai3: Analog input 3 value.
Ai4: Analog input 4 value.
Ai5: Analog input 5 value.
Ai6: Analog input 6 value.
Ai7: Analog input 7 value.
Ai8: Analog input 8 value.
Ai.1: Analog input 1 module.
Ai.2: Analog input 2 module.
Ai.3: Analog input 3 module.
Ai.4: Analog input 4 module.
Ai.E: Enable oPEr Ai7 and Ai8 access.
AiX: Alarm index.
ALG: Algebraic function.
ALM.E: Enable oPEr alarm access.
And: A AND B logic function.
/And: NOT (A AND B) logic function.
And/: A AND (NOT B) logic function.
APLd: Easy-Tune auto parameter load.
Ao: Analog output module.
Ao1: Analog output value 1.
Ao2: Analog output value 2.
Ao3: Analog output value 3.
Ao1.i: Analog output 1 input selector.
Ao2.i: Analog output 2 input selector.
Ao3.i: Analog output 3 input selector.
Ao.1: Analog output 1 module.
Aut: cn.1 auto status.
Aut.2: cn.2 auto status.
b1: Remote setpoint bias.
bASE: Current base (0/4-20 mA).
bAud: Datalink transfer rate.
b.cJc: CJC calibration constant.
biAS: Zero offset calibration constant.
bMV: Zero offset mv calibration constant.
b.tc: Thermocouple type B.
cASc: Cascade control scheme.
chr: Characterizer module.
chr.A: Characterizer A input selector.
chr.b: Characterizer b input selector.
chr.c: Characterizer c input selector.
chr.M: Characterizer mode selector.
cKEY: Configuration pass-key module
cM: Easy-Tune control mode.
cn.1: Control module 1.
cn.2: Control module 2.
conF: Configure menu.
cS: Control scheme module.
cSA: Control scheme analog A input.
cSb: Control scheme analog B input
cSc: Control scheme analog C input.
cSd: Control scheme analog D input.
Appendix D: Prompt List
Appendix D. Prompt List 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
D-1
cSE: Control scheme analog E input.
cSF: Control scheme analog F input.
cSh: Control scheme digital H input.
cSJ: Control scheme digital J input.
cSK: Control scheme digital K input.
cSL: Control scheme digital L input.
c.tc: Thermocouple type C.
cZ: Control zone.
dcP: Duty cycle period.
dEV: Alarm deviation from setpoint.
dFLt: Analog input digital filter.
di: Digital input module.
di1: Discrete input 1 status.
/di1: Discrete input 1 inverted.
di2: Discrete input 2 status.
/di2: Discrete input 2 inverted.
di3: Discrete input 3 status.
/di3: Discrete input 3 inverted.
di4: Discrete input 4 status.
/di4: Discrete input 4 inverted.
di5: Discrete input 5 status.
/di5: Discrete input 5 inverted.
di6: Discrete input 6 status.
/di6: Discrete input 6 inverted.
di7: Discrete input 7 status.
/di7: Discrete input 7 inverted.
di8: Discrete input 8 status.
/di8: Discrete input 8 inverted.
di7.E: Enable oPEr Di7 access.
di8.E: Enable oPEr Di8 access.
dir: Direct.
diS: Disable.
dLE: Datalink enable.
dLP: Datalink parity.
dLS: Datalink stuffing.
do: Digital output module.
do1: Discrete output 1 status.
do2: Discrete output 2 status.
do3: Discrete output 3 status.
do4: Discrete output 4 status.
do5: Discrete output 5 status.
do6: Discrete output 6 status.
do7: Discrete output 7 status.
do8: Discrete output 8 status.
do1.i: Discrete output 1 input selector.
do2.i: Discrete output 2 input selector.
do3.i: Discrete output 3 input selector.
do4.i: Discrete output 4 input selector.
do5.i: Discrete output 5 input selector.
do6.i: Discrete output 6 input selector.
do7.i: Discrete output 7 input selector.
do8.i: Discrete output 8 input selector.
doFb: Digital out feedback.
dout: Easy-Tune output step.
dP: Decimal point locator.
dPV: Easy-Tune PV excursion limit.
dPPV: Easy-Tune prelim PV disturbance.
d.tc: Thermocouple type D.
dtoA: Digital-to-analog.
dtot: Delta pulse total.
dV: Deviation value.
EnA: Enable.
EPb: Resultant %Pb (Easy-Tune).
E.tc: Thermocouple type E.
\E.tc Thermocouple type CH_E.
Etd: Resultant td time (Easy-Tune).
Etr: Resultant tr time (Easy-Tune).
EXrF: External reset feedback.
EZ: Easy-Tune module.
EZ?: Easy-Tune query prompt.
EZ.E: Enable oPEr Easy-Tune access.
FiX: Function index.
Fnc: Math function block output.
Fnc.A: Function input A selector.
Fnc.b: Function input b selector.
Fnc.c: Function input c selector.
Fnc.d: Function input d selector.
Fnc.E: Function input E selector.
Fnc.F: Function input F selector.
Fnc.M: Function module mode selector.
FrQ1: 8-100 kHZ frequency input.
FrQ2: 2.5-100 kHZ frequency input.
FrQ3: 0.5-30 kHZ frequency input.
F.tc: Thermocouple type F.
GAin: Voltage calibration span constant.
G.MV: Millivolt calibration constant.
G.rtd: RTD hardware compensator.
G.tc: Thermocouple type G.
h/- : High alarm only.
h/hh: High/high-high alarms.
h/L: High/low alarm.
hLc.E: Enable oPEr oL, oh, cZ access.
hLiM: High limiter control scheme.
hML: Hard manual limit.
iA: Instrument address.
iLr: Instrument lower range.
in.Ld: Ind/manual loader control scheme.
inV1: Discrete output 1 invert selector.
inV2: Discrete output 2 invert selector.
inV3: Discrete output 3 invert selector.
inV4: Discrete output 4 invert selector.
inV5: Discrete output 5 invert selector.
inV6: Discrete output 6 invert selector.
inV7: Discrete output 7 invert selector.
inV8: Discrete output 8 invert selector.
ir: Instrument range.
J.tc: Thermocouple type J.
K1: Remote setpoint ratio.
K01: FNC/CHR constant 1.
K02: FNC/CHR constant 2.
K03: FNC/CHR constant 3.
K04: FNC/CHR constant 4.
K05: FNC/CHR constant 5.
K06: FNC/CHR constant 6.
K07: Characterizer constant 7.
K08: Characterizer constant 8.
K09: Characterizer constant 9.
K10: Characterizer constant 10.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix D. Prompt List
D-2
K11: Characterizer constant 11.
K12: Characterizer constant 12.
K13: Characterizer constant 13.
K14: Characterizer constant 14.
K15: Characterizer constant 15.
K16: Characterizer constant 16.
K17: Characterizer constant 17.
K18: Characterizer constant 18.
K19: Characterizer constant 19.
K20: Characterizer constant 20.
K21: Characterizer constant 21.
K22: Characterizer constant 22.
K23: Characterizer constant 23.
K24: Characterizer constant 24.
K25: Characterizer constant 25.
K26: Characterizer constant 26.
KEY: Key module.
KP: Easy-Tune calculated gain.
K-SP: Ratio setpoint mode.
K.tc: Thermocouple type K.
-/L: Low alarm only.
LFLo: Linear flow compensation.
LG: Logic module.
LG1: Logic module 1 output.
LG1.A: Logic module 1 A input selector.
LG1.b: Logic module 1 b input selector.
LG1.M: Logic module 1 mode selector.
LG2: Logic module 2 output.
LG2.A: Logic module 2 A input selector.
LG2.b: Logic module 2 b input selector.
LG2.M: Logic module 2 mode selector.
LG3: Logic module 3 output.
LG3.A: Logic module 3 A input selector.
LG3.b: Logic module 3 b input selector.
LG3.M: Logic module 3 mode selector.
LG4: Logic module 4 output.
LG4.A: Logic module 4 A input selector.
LG4.b: Logic module 4 b input selector.
LG4.M: Logic module 4 mode selector.
L/LL: Low/low-low alarm indicators.
LiM: Limiter function.
L.LiM: Low limiter control scheme.
Lin: Linear.
LoG: Logarithmic function.
LSEG: Linear segment characterize.
L.tc: Thermocouple type L.
MFd: Manual feedback disable.
MMt: Minimum manual time.
Mr: Manual reset.
nc: No connect.
no: No.
nonE: None.
n.tc: Thermocouple type n.
oFF: Off.
oh: Output high limit.
oL: Output low limit.
oPEr: Operator menu.
oPr: Operator module.
oPtA: Option A.
oPtb: Option b.
or: A OR B logic function.
or/: A OR NOT B logic function.
/or: NOT (A OR B) logic function.
oSr: Output slew rate.
out: Control output.
oVtS: Output track status.
P: Proportional.
PD: Proportional and derivative.
PI: Proportional and integral.
PID: Proportional, integral, derivative.
PA1: cn.1 AL1 status.
PA2: cn.1 AL2 status.
PA1.2: cn.2 PL1 status.
PA2.2: cn.2 PL2 status.
Pb: Proportional band.
PGrM: Setpoint Programmer.
Pid.E: Enable oPEr tuning access.
PKEY: Program menu pass-key module.
PL1: Process alarm limit 1.
PL2: Process alarm limit 2.
PLiM: Enable parameter modify.
PL.tc: Thermocouple type PLII (platinel).
PoLY: Polynomial function.
PoWr: Exponential function.
P.DDD: Red/green dro decimal selection.
PP.DD: Red/green dro decimal selection.
PPP.D: Red/green dro decimal selection.
PPPP: Red/green dro no decimal.
PrG: Program module.
ProG: Program menu.
Pt.85: 100 ohm platinum RTD .00385.
Pt.91: 100 ohm platinum RTD .00391.
Pt.92: 100 ohm platinum RTD .00392.
PV: Process variable.
PVt: Process variable tracking loop 1.
PVt.2: Process variable tracking loop 2.
rEV: Reverse.
rMt: Remote.
rSV: Reverse output indication.
rSW: Reverse control action.
r.tc: Thermocouple type r.
rtd: RTD 3 or 4 wire selection.
run: Run.
run?: Run query.
SchM: Control scheme selector.
SEL: Selector function.
SFLo: Square root flow compensator.
Sh: Setpoint high limit.
SL: Setpoint low limit.
SnGL: Single loop control scheme.
SP: Control setpoint.
SPAn: Span.
SPM: Setpoint mode.
SPtS: Setpoint track status.
SQrt: Square root signal.
SSr: Setpoint slew rate.
S.tc: Thermocouple type S.
Appendix D. Prompt List 53SL6000 Instruction Manual
D-3
\S.tc: Thermocouple type CH_S.
Std: Standard setpoint mode.
StEP: Programmer step.
StoP: Stop.
StP.E: Enable oPEr prog step access.
StV: Setpoint track value.
SWA: Auto push button.
SWr: Remote push button.
SuMM: Summation function.
SYS: System module.
tAG: Unit tagname.
td: Derivative time.
tLiM: Easy-Tune settling time limiting.
tP: Easy-Tune first order time constant.
tr: Reset time.
t.tc: Thermocouple type t.
u.tc: Thermocouple type u.
Vdn: Control valve down signal.
Vup: Control valve up signal.
Wp: Easy-Tune calculated dead-time.
Xor: A XOR B logic function.
/Xor: NOT (A XOR B) logic function.
YES: Yes.
Zero: Zero.
53SL6000 Instruction Manual Appendix D. Prompt List
D-4
The Companys policy is one of continuous product improvement and the
right is reserved to modify the information contained herein without notice.
2001 ABB Automation Inc. Printed in USA
ABB Inc.
125 East County Line Road
Warminster, PA 18974 USA
Tel. 215-674-6000
FAX: 215-674-7183
ABB Instrumentation Ltd
Howard Road, St. Neots
Cambs. England, PE19 3EU
Tel. +44 (0) 1480-475-321
FAX: +44 (0) 1480-217-948
ABB Instrumentation S.p.A
Via Sempione 243
20016 Pero (Milano) Italy
Tel: +39 (02) 33928 1
Fax: +39 (02) 33928 240
ABB Automation Products GmbH
Industriestr. 28
D-65760 Eschborn Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 6196 800 0
Fax: +49 (0) 6196 800 1849
P
N
2
4
9
9
1